Skip to main content

Full text of "The manual on barbering, hairdressing, manicuring, facial massage, electrolysis and chiropody as taught in the Moler system of colleges"

See other formats


ri^v6 


"  ^ '     <^ 


*      0^  ^ 


.40^ 


>^^      -*^ 


THE  MANUAL 

ON 

BARBERING, 

HAIRDRESSING,  MANICUR 

ING,  FACIAL  MASSAGE, 

ELECTROLYSIS  AND 

CHIROPODY 

AS  TAUGHT  IM 


I  Tut  »AMiRS  MAI 


MAHIWI  retPftRK  TMi  AmEnriCi  A/ID  SJlDiS  mt  ffljAMIAU    SifIT  POST  BUI)  fo«  .|« 


JL|  THE   1^ 

OF  COLLEGES 


•  ^  /  /  f  I  I  \  \  \ 


BY  A.  B.  MOLER 


PRICE  $1.00 


TT^Uo 


\~ 


LIBRARY  of  CONGRESS 
One  Copy  deceived 

JAN  27  1906 

Cop^jri^nt  tiitry 

OUSS     (Z    ^^c.  No, 
'  ^CCPY   b! 


COPYRIGHT    1906 
BY 

A.  B.  MOIvKR 


C 


PREFACE. 

IN  the  pages  following-  it  has  been  my  intention  to 
illustrate  and  present  a  set  of  rules  that  will  at 
all  times  be  a  guide,  both  while  learning  and  after 
completing  the  trades.  I  have  tried  to  present  a  sys- 
tem thorough  and  simple,  illustrating  in  detail  the 
requirements  for  the  real  artist  and  the  training 
necessary  to  familiarize  them  with  the  technical 
details  of  the  profession 

By  reason  of  my  eight  years  constant  teaching  and 
my  fifteen  years  of  service  in  the  work,  I  feel  that 
no  one  has  had  a  better  opportunity  to  practice  and 
study  the  work  that  I  now  lay  before  you. 

I  hope  to  make  this  book  of  more  than  ordinary 
service,  and  by  following  its  instructions  closely, 
combined  with  the  advantages  our  colleges  offer, 
there  is  no  chance  for  failures. 


INDEX. 

Page  No. 

Part  1.  Physical  and  Mental  Requirements  . .  .   9 — 10 

Part  2.  Selection  and  Care  of  Tools 11 — 23 

Part  3.  Honing-  and  Stropping .  24 — 29 

Part  4.  Shaving- 29—39 

Part  5.  Hair  Cutting- 39—49 

Part  6.  Beard  Trimming 5'^— 54 

Part  7.  Shampoo,  Miscellaneous 55 — 69 

Parts.  Men's  Facial  Massag^e 70—112 

BOOK  IT. 

Ivadies'  Hairdressing- 7 

Furniture  and  Arrang-ement  of  Establishments. 9 — 16 

Selection  and  Care  of  Tools 16 — 21 

Combing-,  Dressing-,  Shampooing,  etc 21 — 42 

Marcel  Wave 42—40 

Dyeing-,  Bleaching-,  Etc 46 — 58 

Scalp  Massag-e , 58 — 64 

Formulas  and  Price  List 64 — 67 

Hair  Work 67—91 

Manicuring 91 — 104 

Facial  Massage 104—126 

Electrolysis 126—141 

Chiropody 141—162 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


PART  I. 


PHYSICAL     AND     ME^NTAL    REQUIREMENTS 
OF  THE  BARBER. 

In  considering-  the  idea  of  becoming-  a  barber,  the 
first  question  that  presents  itself  is:  What  are  the 
requirements  necessary  in  order  to  insure  success 
after  laboring-  at  this  work?  Will  my  nervous  sys- 
tem permit  of  handling-  the  razor?  Will  the  nature 
of  work  I  have  done  in  the  past  bar  me  from  this 
profession?  Are  my  mental  propensities  such  thatthey 
will  allow  me  to  wait  upon  others  with  patience  and 
with  solicitude  for  their  welfare?  The  question  is 
often  asked  by  those  preparing-  to  take  up  the  work: 
"Will  I  make  a  barber?"  There  is  but  one  answer  to 
this,  and  that  is,  have  you  patience  and  energy  to 
practice  diligently  at  the  work  until  you  haye  thor- 
oughly mastered  it,  providing-  you  have  at  your  dis- 
posal the  opportunity  for  constant  practice  and  the 
assistance  of  skillful  instructors? 

There  is  no  part  of  the  barber  trade  that  is  impos- 


10  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAI^. 

sible  for  anyone  with  ordinary  ability .  No  man  is  too 
nervous  to  take  up  this  trade  as  it  is  part  of  your 
education  while  a  student  to  overcome  your  nervous 
temperament.  Proper  practice  (of  which  we  shall 
Pfive  you  a  description  in  the  following  pages)  is  sure 
to  overcome  all  disadvantages  in  this  line,  but  we 
would  advise  that  no  person  take  up  this  work  who 
has  not  first  made  up  his  mind  to  become  a  public 
servant,  to  be  patient  and  painstaking  with  custo- 
mers, and  to  be  always  pleasant  and  agreeable. 

This  is  not  a  work  that  requires  any  special  adapt- 
ation, but  like  every  other  trade  that  is  mechanical, 
it  is  one  that  requires  practice.  Some  will  tell  you 
that  you  never  can  become  a  barber  if  you  are  not 
gifted  with  particular  talents,  but  it  has  been  demon 
strated  that  the  most  awkward  beginners  often  make 
the  most  graceful  graduates.  Grace  and  ease  of  mo- 
tion are  acquired  by  the  continued  using  of  certain 
muscles. 

Good  taste  has  much  to  do  with  proper  hair  cutting- 
and  the  different  styles  of  this  work  must  necessarily 
be  a  study.  No  man  is  naturally  gifted  with  ability 
to  trim  hair  gracefully,  and  each  one  must  practice 
and  study  this  work  alike.  While  some  are  more  apt 
and  painstaking  than  others,  every  one  can  follow 
examples  and  directions  laid  down  by  instructors. 
Thus  you  see  no  person  of  sound  mind  and  ordinary 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  11 

ability  need  exclude  themselves  from  this  trade  if 
they  are  willing-  to  apply  themselves  to  the  work. 
Carelessness  has  no  place  in  barber  business,  and 
no  one  will  succeed  either  in  business  for  himself  or 
as  a  journeyman,  who  is  not  both  caerfulwith  his  own 
appearance  as  well  as  that  of  his  shop. 

PART  II. 

SELECTION  AND  CARE  OF  TOOLS. 

Good  tools  in  every  mechanical  trade  have  much 
to  do  with  the  tradesman's  success.  This  is  particu- 
larly true  of  the  Barber  Trade.  No  one  can  be  a 
first-class  workman  without  first-class  tools  kept  in 
proper  order.  We  too  often  find  tradesmen  trying  to 
apply  their  skill  with  tools  wholly  unfit  for  their 
work. 

RAZORS. 

In  the  selection  of  a  Barber's  Outfit  one  of  the 
most  essential  things  is  the  Razor.  Many  times  a 
perfect  razor  is  condemned  by  the  workman  who  has 
not  given  it  a  satisfactory  trial  or  honed  it  down  to  a 
perfect  edge.  New  razors  are  never  honed  in  perfect 
condition,    and    every    razor  when   first   purchased 


12  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

should  be  g-iven  at  least  a  week's  trial  before  being 
condemned.  No  one  can  tell  perfect  steel  from  the 
looks  of  it  unless  it  has  been  burned  in  grinding, 
which  would  cause  it  to  show  black  spots,  such  spots 
as  we  sometimes  find  in  a  chisel  or  plow  shear.  In 
selecting  a  razor,  as  far  as  the  steel  is  concerned, 
this  is  the  only  thing  to  look  for.  You  will  never  be 
able  to  discoyer  whether  your  razor  is  too  soft  or 
too  hard  from  shaying  and  honing  it,  as  there  are  too 
many  conditions  which  afiFect  a  razor  while  in  pro 
cess  of  sharpening.  The  fact  that  a  razor  sharpens 
slowly  or  that  it  takes  time  to  bring  it  to  an  edge 
is  no  indication  that  the  steel  is  hard  or  soft,  one 
reason  being  a  razor  may  have  but  little  concave 
and  therefore  so  much  of  the  blade  strikes  the  hone 
that  it  naturally  cuts  away  slowly.  It  is  an  easy 
matter,  however,  to  detect  good  or  poor  workmanship 
in  the  manufacture  of  this  tool. 

A  full  concave  razor  is  one  that  is  hollowed  out  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  leave  the  thinnest  part  of  the 
blade  between  the  back  of  the  razor  and  the  edge- 
This  leaves  a  bulge  or  thicker  part  between  the  edge 
and  the  thinner  portion  of  the  razor,  and  can  be 
detected  by  rubbing  with  finger  and  thumb  down  the 
sides  of  the  blade  as  shown  in  the  cut. 

A  half  and  three-quarter  concave  have  less  of  a 
'  oUow  grind  as  described.     The  full  concave  is  the 


SIZES. 


% 


T 


CONCAVES. 


Full  Three-fourths  Half 


concavePIain  grind 
POINTS. 


Squa 


i 


re  point.  Hollow  point.  Dutch  point.  Irish  point. 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL.  13 

most  expensive  style  of  grinding'  we  have,  and  is  only 
used  in  a  high  grade  razor.     It  is  the  most  desirable 


TESTING  A  CONCAVE. 

as  it  lightens  the  weight  of  the  blade  according  to  the 
width  of  it,  and  requires  less  honing  and  stropping 
to  vsharpen  the  same. 

r  a  selecting  tools  never  stick  to  certain  brands 
simply  because  they  have  been  recommended,  for 
nearly  every  well  known  razor  has  cheap  imitations. 
The  five-eight  size  is  ordinarily  the  most  convenient 
and,  although  it  is  a  little  larger  than  most  barbers 
prefer,  the  razor  always  grows   smaller  instead  of 


14  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL,. 

larger,  and  it  is  best  to  guard  against  getting  them 
too  small  to  begin  with. 

SHEiARS. 

The  quality  of  shears  can  be  tested  by  a  close  ex- 
amination of  the  blades.  In  the  cheaper  qualities, 
or  what  is  known  as  the  steel  laid,  only  a  small  por- 
tion of  the  blade  is  solid  steel.  This  quality  of 
shears  is  usually  heavier  in  proportion  to  the  length 
than  those  of  the  grade  known  as  full  steel.  In 
nearly  every  cheap  grade  of  shears,  by  examining  the 
inside  of  the  blades,  you  will  see  a  different  oolor  in 
the  metal  at  the  point  the  iron  and  steel  are  welded 
together.  A  steel  laid  shear,  as  a  rule,  gives  good  ser- 
vice as  long  as  it  lasts,  but  it  is  not  as  durable  as 
one  made  entirely  of  steel.  The  full  steel  shear  usu- 
ally has  thin,  narrow  blades  that  are  sprung  in  such 
a  shape  that  when  the  shears  are  closed  the  two 
blades  only  touch  each  other  at  the  point.  A  non- 
experienced  man  is  often  liable  to  mistake  this  as  a 
flaw,  but  a  shear,  in  order  to  cut  at  the  point,  must 
have  the  spring  or  set.  The  patent  burr  fasteners  as 
a  rule  are  of  little  advantage,  as  a  shear  must  be 
ground  and  set  at  intervals  during  its  service.  Never 
try  to  sharpen  your  own  shears  or  tighten  the 
screws  as  in  this  way  you  are  apt  to  spring  the 
blades  and  make  them  entirely  useless-,     it  costs  but 


THE  GENUINE  IMPORTED  RAZOR.  THE  CHEAP  IMITATION. 


FULL  STEEL,    FRENCH  PATTERN. 


STEEL  LAID,   NICKLE  HANDLE. 


CHEAPER  GRADE,   JAPAN  HANDLE. 


THE   BARBERS'  MAKUAL,.  IS 

a  small  amount  to  have  your  shears  well  ground,  and 
well  ground  shears  are  as  essential  to  good  work  as 
a  properly  ground  razor  Never  give  your  shears  to 
the  street  grinders,  nor  try  them  on  any  shear  sharp- 
ening device.  When  a  shear  becomes  too  smooth,  it 
can  sometimes  be  wired  a  trifle  by  rubbing  it  over  a 
rough  hone  or  piece  of  steel,  but  this  should  not  be 
praticed  often.  The  blades  must  be  roughed  to  a 
certain  extent  in  order  to  keep  the  hair  from  slipping 

out  when  the  blades  come  together. 

The  cheaper  grades  of  shears,  as  a  rule  have  the 
black  japanned  handles,  while  the  higher  grades  are 
nickel  handled  and  highly  polished.  A  seven,  seven 
and  one-half  and  eight  inch  shear  are  the  most  con- 
venient sizes  for  barbers'  use. 


HONES. 

There  are  many  different  grades  and  qualities  of 
hones,  and  no  doubt  the  opinion  of  barbers  varies  in. 
regard  to  this  article  more  than  in  regard  to  any 
other  tool  in  the  barber's  kit.  The  German  Water 
Hone  is  the  oldest  style,  or  the  first  razor  hone  used. 
They  still  are  considered  by  many  to  be  the  best  hone 
in  the  market.  There  is  certainly  nothing  that  will 
compare  with  them  for  the  apprentice,   as  they  cut 


16  THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

slow  and  neyer  overhone,  as  does  the  coi,xser  and 
faster  cutting  stones.  It  usually  requires  a  little 
more  time  to  cut  a  razor  to  an  edge  on  this  stone, 
but  once  to  an  edg-e  it  keeps  it  in  the  same  condition 
without  damaging-  the  blade. 

In  using  the  oil  or  lather  hone,  more  care  should  be 
taken  to  prevent  "overhoning,"  for  when  the  razor  is 
honed  to  an  edge,  it  will,  with  more  honing,  crumble 
or  break  away  to  what  is  known  as  the  wire  edge. 
The  lather  hones  are  of  many  different  qualities  and 
it  is  something  of  a  gamble  to  get  a  perfect  hone. 
They  vary  greatly  in  prices  according  to  quality. 

The  Swatty,  the  same  as  the  lather  stone,  is  fast 
cutting,  and  is  probably  ^.he  hardest  hone  to  work 
with  although  it  brings  a  razor  to  an  edge  quickly. 
An  apprentice  would  seldom  be  successful  with  this 
style  of  hone.  They  are  highly  recommended  by  the 
expert  or  old  barber,  but  should  never  be  recom- 
mended to  a  beginner. 

STROPS. 

Strops  should  always  be  used  in  pairs,  canvas  and 
leather.  The  canvas  is  the  one  you  first  apply  to  the 
razor  and  finish  it  with  a  smooth  leather  strop* 
Razors  in  constant  stropping,  on  a  leather  strop  be- 
come too  smooth,  and  require  a  certain  amount  of  use 


'if' 


T*l 


WATER 


OIL  OR  LATHER 


SWATY 


SHELL  AND  CANVAS,    PADDr:D  HANDLE. 


HORSE  HIDE  AND  CANVAS  PATENT  SWIVEL. 


THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

on  the  canvas.  This  is  in  order  to  roug-hen  or  draw 
out  the  edg-e,  and  when  properly  stropped  they  re- 
quire less  honing-.  The  higher  grade  of  canyas  strop 
is  made  of  seamless  hose,  and  can  be  used  on  either 
side.  You  should  be  careful  to  keep  canvas  strops 
dry  as  dampness  swells  the  grain  and  roughens  the 
strop.  The  better  quality  is  usually  made  of  linen 
the  smooth  and  tightly  woven  quality.  The  cheaper 
grades  are  sometimes  made  of  canvas,  and  are  known 
as  the  flat  web.  They  are  of  a  single  thickness,  less 
durable  and  can  be  used  only  on  one  side.  Some 
cheaper  grades  are  also  made  of  cotton.  Canvas  strops 
in  constant  use  gather  dust  and  grit  which  should  be 
cleaned  off  by  applying  a  little  lather  and  immedi- 
ately scraping  it  off  with  the  blade  of  the  shear,  or  a 
similar  blunt  instrument.  Grit  on  a  canvas  strop  will 
do  much  damage  to  a  razor,  and  should  be  watched 
for  closely.  In  breaking  in  a  new  strop,  the  grain 
should  first  be  filled  with  beeswax  or  soap,  and  this 
should  be  rubbed  in  thoroughly  with  a  bottle  or  a 
similar  instrument.  There  is  considerable  labor  at- 
tached to  preparing,'  a  pair  of  strops. 

In  selecting  a  leather  strop,  Russia  leather  is  usu- 
ally most  desirable,  although  the  most  expensiye,  and 
is  a  tough,  thick,  serviceable  leather.  It  is  usually 
told  by  the  smell,  and  by  the  grain  on  the  back  of 
the  strop      It  requires  some  time  to  prepare  a    Rus- 


18  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAI*. 

sian  leather  strop  for  service,  but  when  once  broken 
in,  it  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  is  not  easy  to  cut.  The 
strop  should  be  prepared  by  putting-  thick  lather  on 
the  surface,  and  rubbing-  it  in  well,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  canvas  strop.  From  five  to  ten  minutes 
should  be  spent  on  a  Russia  leather  strop  every 
day  for  two  or  three  weeks.  The  labor  required 
in  preparing-  this  strop  is  worth  more  than  the  strop 
itself.  Many  old  barbers  possess  strops  worth  from 
$5.00  to  $25.00.  A  Russia  leather  improves  with  age_ 
A  pig-  skin  strop  is  of  the  same  nature,  and  should 
be  broken  in  in  the  same  way;  it  is  most  favored  by 
some  barbers,  and  although  not  quite  as  durable,  it 
is  more  easily  prepared.  These  strops  are  never  made 
in  cheap  qualities,  there  being-  but  two  grades, 
medium  and  heavy. 

The  horsehide  strop  is  made  of  many  different 
qualities,  and  sells  at  different  prices.  The  shell,  or 
horsetail,  is  probably  the  best  of  this  class.  It  is 
always  smooth,  never  requires  finishing  or  breaking 
in,  and  is  of  a  thinner  or  lighter  grade.  This  is  the 
most  durable  of  horsehide  strops.  The  other  quali- 
ties or  cheaper  g-rades  are  of  a  softer  material,  and 
usually  draw  or  hang-  to  the  razor  in  stropping-. 
This  quality  of  strop  usually  requires  more  work  to 
put  a  razor  in  condition,  and  they  are  less  service- 


HIGH  GKADE,    IMPROVED  SPRING. 


CHEAPER   GRADE,    OLD    STYLE    SPRING. 


THE   BARBERS"  MANUAL.  19 

able.  They  are  easily  cut  and  short  lived.  When 
they  once  begin  to  work  rough,  there  .i"  no  remedy 
for  them. 

CLIPPEiRS. 

Of  the  strictly  high  grade  clippers  there  are  but 
few  brands  to  select  from.  Clippers  are  constantly 
changing  and  being  improved  upon,  and  like  all 
classes  of  machinery,  they  soon  become  old  style. 
Among  the  latest  improvements  there  is  one  called 
the  "pull  spring."  It  is  prompt  in  action,  strong 
and  serviceable,  and  can  be  adjusted  to  most  any 
hand.  This  spring  is  found  in  but  two  brands  of 
clippers.  The  adjusting  blade  made  to  cut  different 
lengths  is  of  little  or  no  use,  for  its  work  is  ragged 
and  gives  the  hair  the  appearance  of  three  or  four 
weeks' growth.  The  only  care  that  is  necessary  for 
this  grade  of  clippers  is  that  they  should  be  kept  well 
oiled  and  when  once  properly  adjusted,  should  be 
left  in  that  state.  It  is  bad  policy  to  readjust  the 
machine,  except  when  it  must  be  taken  apart  and 
cleaned.  The  plates  should  be  wiped  off  about  once 
a  month,  or  should  be  washed  out  without  readjust- 
ing by  working  kerosene  through  them.  Sewing  ma- 
chine or  bicycle  oil  is  the  best  to  use.  This  grade  of 
machine  can    be   made   to   cut   two   lengths  by  sim- 


30  THE    BARBERS-  MANUAIv. 

ply  turning-  it  over  iti  the  hand  and  using-  it  for  the 
neck  or  "00"  clipper.  This  saves  the  necessity  of 
two  pair  of  clippers. 

Among-  the  cheaper  g-rades  the  brands  are  numer- 
ous and  all  about  the  same  quality.  Some  have 
the  spring-s  in  the  handles,  others  have  the  concealed 
spring  in  the  blades.  They  are  so  constructed  that 
they  will  cut  but  one  length,  and  in  doing-  the  nicer 
part  of  the  work  it  would  be  necessary  to  have  a 
short  or  an  "0"  clipper  besides  the  regulation  length 
of  an  eigth  inch.  These  clippers  like  the  higher 
grade,  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  oiled  about 
once  a  month,  or  according  to  the  amount  of  work 
being  done. 

COMBS. 

In  the  selection  of  combs,  the  "hand  made"  bone 
comb  is  preferable;  It  should  be  a  tapering  comb  of 
medium  size,  and  one  that  can  be  well  handled  in 
long-  or  short  hair.  A  neck  comb  is  usually  con- 
sidered unnecessary  where  the  comb  is  tapered  from 
a  coarser  to  finer  teeth. 

Aluminum  combs  are  considered  by  some  the  most 
convenient,  but  there  is  an  objection  to  this  style  of 
comb,  as  the  teeth  often  come  in  contact  with  the 
blade  of  your  shears. 


o 

o 

« 
o 

w 


NiiJ 


O 
u 

« 

M 

<! 

W 

a: 
o 

w 
w 

u 
en 

<; 

H 
en 


CONVENIENT  TOOL  CASE  FOR  TRAVELING  BARBERS. 


VH£  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  % 

Among:  the  cheaper  grades  are  the  "machine  made" 
horn  combs,  which  are  usually  more  bluut  and  less 
convenient.  The  heavy  rubber  combs  are  of  no  ser- 
vice to  the  barber  on  account  of  their  thickness. 

Celluloid  combs  are  of  no  value,  for  in  singeing^ 
hair  they  are  liable  to  catch  fire. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  to  keep  a  comb  perfectly 
clean.  Thread  or  string  is  very  handy  in  cleaning  it. 
Take  a  half  dozen  or  dozen  threads  fastened  at  both 
ends  and  comb  through  them  until  teeth  are  thor- 
oughly cleaned. 

TOOI^  CASES. 

A  tool  case  is  not  an  absclute  necessity,  but  is  very 
conyenient  for  carrying  or  keeping  in  place  your 
outfit.  The  best  quality  is  leather  and  it  should 
have  a  sufficient  number  of  pockets  to  carry  all  tools 
of  your  outfit.  The  cheaper  qualities  are  made  of 
canvas  and  can  be  obtained  in  any  size  desired. 

JACKE^TS. 

No  barber  should  work  at  the  chair  without  a 
jacket,  as  it  looks  unprofessional  and  untidy  to  see 
a  barber  at  a  chair  in  his  shirt  sleeves  or  wearing  the 
Did  style  apron. 

The  better  quality  of  jackets  are  made  of  duck  aad 


22  THE  BARBERS'    MANUAL,. 

have  sometimes  striped  pockets  and  collars,  or  they 
are  often  made  up  of  black  and  white  goods.  Sleeve 
vests  are  worn  some  by  barbers  but  are  not  as  uni- 
versal as  the  regulation  barber  coat. 

Cheaper  qualities  are  of  drill.  In  selecting  a  j  acket 
do  not  make  the  mistake  of  getting  a  waiter's  jacket, 
which  is  a  short  coat  of  the  same  material,  but  without 
the  convenient  pockets  of  the  barber's  coat.  Always 
select   a   jacket  with   a   collar   and  with   detachable 

buttons. 

HAIR  BRUSHES. 

The  above  named  articles  are  all  that  are  necess^^y 
for  a  journey  man's  outfit,  but  in  conducting  a  shop  for 
yourself  more  tools  are  necessary  and  great  care 
should  be  taken  in  selecting  good  bristle  brushes  for 
the  hair.  Barbers  are  often  negligent  as  to  the  care 
of  their  brushes,  allowing  them  to  become  dirty  and 
greasy  and  unfit  for  use.  A  hair  brush  should  be 
cleaned  thoroughly,  at  least  once  a  month.  The  best 
way  of  cleaning  the  brush  is  by  strong  ammonia  wa- 
ter or  sea  foam,  rubbing  the  preparation  thoroughly 
through  the  bristles  and  with  a  coarse  comb  clean  out 
all  the  dandruff,  etc.,  from  among  the  bristles.  After 
the  brush  has  been  thoroughly  cleansed  and  rinsed, 
tap  it  lightly  on  the  bristles  until  dry. 

LATHER  BRUSHES. 
The  most  serviceable  and  probably  the  best  lather 


PLAIN   WHITE   BARBER  JACKET. 


SLEEVE    VEST. 


c 

z 

h 
Oi 
< 

O 

> 

o 
u 


o 

t-( 

o 

o 

O 

K 

m 
<: 
« 


RUBBKR  FERRULE. 


CAMEL   HAIR. 


NECK  DUSTER  FOR  BRUSHING  LOOSE  HAIR 
AFTER  CUTTING. 


THE    BARBERS,  MANUAL.  ^ 

brushes  are  those  whose  bristles  are  set  in  vulcanized 
rubber.  The  soft  camel  hair  brush  is  of  no  seryice 
to  the  barber  as  it  becomes  too  soft  when  in  con- 
stant use. 

leather   brushes  as   well   as   cups   should    be  thor- 
oug^hly  rinsed  before  or  after  each  shave. 

STERILIZING  AND  ANTISEPTIC  SOLUTIONS. 

Sterilizing-  your  razor  is  a  very  important  feature 
in  the  barber  business,  also  the  use  of  antiseptics  for 
your  brushes,  cups  and  strops.  In  this  care  of  tools, 
much  neg-lect  has  been  shown  among"  past  members  of 
the  fraternity,  oftentimes  with  disastrous  results. 
Your  patronag^e  can  be  increased  by  strict  attention 
to  this  one  important  feature.  This  process  should 
be  resorted  to  as  often  as  seems  necessary.  After 
working  oyer  a  sore  face,  or  what  we  may  term  a 
syphilitic  subject,  wash  your  hands  in  a  mild  solution 
of  Bichloride  of  Mercury.  If  you  have  no  steam 
sterilizer,  your  razors  can  be  dipped  or  boiled  without 
injury  to  them  in  the  same  solution. 

Steam  sterilizers  are  much  preferable  and  can  be 
secured  as  cheap  as  75  cen.s.  Plac6  your  mugs,  lather 
brushes  and  hair  brushes  in  water  at  a  temperature 
of  a  bout  150  degrees.  Strops  also  may  be  treated  the 
same  way  and  afterwards  oiled  with  carbonized  vase- 
line.    Strops  will  need  this  process  very  seldom. 


24  THIS    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

PART  III. 

HONING  AND  STROPPING. 

The  sequel  to  a  barber's  success,  as  far  as  shaving"  is 
concerned,  lies  in  honing"  and  stropping-  the  razor. 
This  is  not  a  g^reat  task  when  proper  instructions  are 
given  or  when  care  is  taken  to  hone  at  the  proper 
time  or  strop  sufficiently  while  the  razor  is  in  use. 
No  deep  art  or  mystery  lies  in  this  part  of  the  profes- 
sion as  miny  barbers  who  have  never  been  properly 
taught  are  sometimes  led  to  suppose.  Many  work- 
mei,  good  in  every  other  part  of  the  work,  sel- 
dom haye  a  sharp  razor,  and  again,  no  barber  has  be- 
come so  proficient  that  at  all  times  he  has  his  razo^ 
sharp.  There  are  so  many  different  conditions  of 
atmosphere,  heat  and  cold,  etc.,  which  affect  the  edge 
of  the  razor  that  it  is  practically  an  impossibility  to 
keep  one  razor  always  in  condition,  but  there  can  be 
no  plausible  excuse  for  a  man  with  two  or  three 
razors  not  having  one  of  them  always  with  a  keen 
edge. 

HONING. 

No  matter  what  hone  is  used,  honing  is  always  done 
in  the  same  way  and  the  same  method  of  testing  the 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUALc 


25 


edge  is  applied,  but  with  each  style  of  hone  the  edg-e 
has  an  entirely  different  feeling-  and  it  is  always  best 
to  become  accustomed  to  one  stone  and  learn  the 
peculiarities  of  its  work.  Never  try  to  hone  a  razor 
with  a  nick  in  it,  nor  with  an  extremely  blunt  edge, 
as  it  is  impossible  to  keep  a  smooth,  straight  edge 
when  it  is  necessary  to  cut  the  razor  down  to  any 
extent.     Razors   in  this  condition  should  always  be 


HONING. 

sent  to  the  grinder  with  instructions  as  to  what  style 
af  g-rind  or  concave  is  required. 

In  beginning  your  work,  tirst  prepare  your  hone.  In 
using-  the  water  hone  see  that  it  is  perfectly  clean  and 
free  from  dirt  or  grease,  then  wet  the  rubber  with 
moderately  warm  water,  also  see  that  the  hone  is  not 
extremely  cold  or  hot,  as  the  temperature  will  haye 
much  to  do  in  drawing  out    or  extending  the   edge 


26  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

of  the  blade.  Prepare  your  hone  with  a  thick  grit 
or  lather  by  rubbing  the  hone  proper  with  the  rub- 
ber and  always  keeping  it  moist.  Lay  the  razor 
perfectly  flat  on  the  hone  and  draw  toward  the  edge, 
diagonally  from  the  heel  to  the  point  as  shown  in  cut. 
Turn  the  razor  on  the  back  without  lifting  it  from  the 
hone  and  slide  into  position  for  the  other  side.  Hold 
the  razor  with  the  first  finger  on  the  shank  of  the 
blade  in  such  a  way  as  to  turn  it  freely  in  the  hand 
and  so  that  the  entire  length  of  the  blade  will  be 
honed  alike.  It  will  require  some  practice  to  become 
handy  in  turning  the  razor.  Work  slowly  and  with 
some  old  useless  razor  until  you  have  mastered  the 
stroke.  A  slight  mistake  on  the  hone  could  easily 
ruin  a  high  grade  razor. 

Testing  the  edge  of  a  razor  is  done  by  wetting  the 
thumb  or  finger  nail  and  drawing  the  edge  of  the 
razor  over  the  thumb  or  nail  with  just  enough  heft 
to  allow  it  to  cut  in  or  slide  over  the  nail.  If  the 
razor  has  a  blunt  thick  edge,  it  will  slide  over  the 
nail  without  cutting.  This  will  signify  that  it  needs 
more  honing  to  bring  it  to  the  proper  condition.  If 
the  razor  cuts  into  the  nail  irregularly  with  a  rough, 
grating  feeling  this  signifies  that  the  razor  has  a 
rough,  wiry  edge  and  requires  more  honing.  The 
razor,  when  in  perfect  condition,  will  draw  into  the 
»^ail  with  the  keen  smooth  edge.     You  cannot  be  de- 


TESTING   EDGE   AFTER   HONING. 


TESTING   EDGE   AFTER    STROPPING. 


STROPPING. 


THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL.  Kf 

ceived  in  this  test  when  you  become  sufficiently  ac- 
quainted with  the  edge  to  detect  the  different  feeling-s. 
This  test  should  be  used  only  in  honing-  and  not  in 
stropping-,  as  after  the  razor  is  stropped,  it  has  an  en- 
tirely different  feeling  and  would  slide  over  the  nail 
as  though  greased. 

In  using  the  swatty  or  lather  hone,  mix  a  thick 
lather  and  apply  to  the  hone,  always  keeping  it  well 
moistened  with  the  substance. 

It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  you  will  become  a 
skillful  honer  without  the  necessary  practice  and  in- 
struction, and  much  depends  on  the  stropping  after 
leaving  the  hone,  A  razor  will  not  always  take  the 
same  style  of  an  edge.  As  stated,  it  sometimes  de- 
pends on  the  atmosphere  or  heat  and  cold.  If  diffi- 
culty is  met  with  in  getting  the  required  edge,  it 
oftentimes  is  a  benefit  to  lay  the  razor  by  for  a  short 
time  and  allow  the  temperature  to  make  the  change. 
At  times  five  minutes  work  will  do  more  for  you  in 
sharpening  a  razor  than  an  hour  at  other  times. 
Thus  you  will  see  no  man  is  always  master  of  this 
art. 

STROPPING. 

After  a  razor  is  properly  honed  it  should  be 
stropped  yery  little,  if  any,  on  the  canvas  strop.     If 


2&  THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

a  razor  seems  to  haye  taken  too  smooth  an  edg^e, 
it  can  be  roughed  a  little  with  the  canvas  strop  and 
then  smoothed  to  the  proper  condition  on  the  leather, 
or  if  a  razor  seems  to  be  left  a  little  too  rough  by  the 
hone  it  sometimes  can  be  stropped  to  a  better  condi- 
tion on  the  canyas.  The  main  object  being"  to  bring 
it  to  the  keen,  vet  smooth  edge.  A  razor  can  be 
smooth,  and  not  keen  and  sharp  or  can  be  too 
jmooth,  but  never  too  sharp. 

Every  barber  has  his  pet  razor,  for  with  this  par- 
ticular one  he  has  learned  the  requirements  in  hon- 
ing" and  stropping".  Considerable  practice  is  necessary 
to  become  easy  and  graceful  in  stropping".  The  razor 
should  be  held  in  such  a  way  as  to  allow  it  to  turn  in 
the  hand  easily  and  always  be  wiped  over  the  strop 
perfectly  flat  with  back  of  blade  as  well  as  edge  placed 
tight  on  the  leather,  Turn  it  on  the  back  without 
lifting  it  from  the  strop,  and  as  in  honing,  do  this 
work  slowly  and  carefully  until  you  have  become 
proficient  in  the  motion.  The  best  class  of  barbers 
never  try  to  play  tunes  with  their  razor  and  strops 
as  is  often  seen  among  those  who  care  more  for 
makine:  a  show  than  for  the  edge  of  the  razor.  More 
stropping  is  necessary  with  a  freshly  honed  razor 
than  one  that  has  shaved  a  half  dozen  beards.  A 
razor  just  off  from  the  hone  is  usually  a  little  rough 
and  irritating  to  the  face  and  should  be  first  used  on 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL.  29 

a  ligrlit  beard.  It  is  poor  policy  for  a  barber  to  hone 
up  all  of  his  razors  at  once,  or  eveti  more  than  one 
at  a  time,  for  it  is  necessary  to  have  at  least  one 
razor  always  ready  for  any  sort  of  beard  that  comcs 
in.  It  is  sometimes  good  policy  for  a  barber  to  have 
a  strop  filled  with  emery  flour  or  razor  paste.  When 
the  edgies  become  too  smooth  and  you  have  no  time 
for  honing,  a  few  strokes  on  the  coarse  strop  will 
draw  out  the  blunt  edge.  This  should  not  be  prac- 
ticed often,  howeyer,  and  only  with  a  razor  that 
has  shaved  forty  or  fifty  men  without  honing. 

Razors  have  been  known  to  shave  500  men  with 
stropping  only  and  again  the  same  razor  would  not 
hold  an  edge  for  a  half  dozen  beards.  It  is  not  always 
the  fault  of  the  barber. 

PART  IV. 

SHAVING. 

Shaving  is  an  art.  Proficiency  in  this  work  cannot 
be  obtained  without  much  practice,  and  while  you 
will  be  benefitted  much  by  following  these  rules,  prac- 
tical demonstration  is  the  most  essential  guide. 

In  preparing   a   customer  for   a   shave,    first    thor- 

ughly  rinse  the  brush  and  cup  with  warm  water  to 

prevent  the  spreading  of  disease.     A  thick,  creamy 


30  THE   BARBERS'  MANUA.L. 

lather  should  be  mixed,  just  stiff  enough  to  be  handled 
nicely  on  the  face.  If  left  too  thin,  it  is  apt  to  run 
down  the  neck  or  on  to  the  collar.  Many  barbers  say 
it  is  impossible  to  learn  even  how  to  lather  in  the 
length  of  time  our  College  proposes  to  teach  the 
trade,  and  it  is  very  true  that  some  men  do  not  learn 
this  work  well.  While  there  is  no  skill  to  be  dis- 
played in  lathering,  a  barber  must  always  be  careful 
and  painstaking  in  this  work.  The  barber  that  will 
not  be  thoughtful  enough  to  do  this  work  should 
never  need  expect  to  claim  custom,  as  this  is  the 
first  impression  upon  the  customer.  The  face  should 
be  lathered  by  applying  the  brush  in  a  circular  mo- 
tion, which  allows  the  brush  to  brew  lather  of  itself. 
The  beginner  is  apt  to  handle  the  lather  brush  as  the 
painter  does  the  paint  brush.  Care  must  be  taken 
not  to  allow  the  lather  to  work  into  the  mouth,  nose 
or  ears. 

After  applying  the  lather,  rub  it  lightly  into  the 
beard,  and  remember  that  whether  the  beard  be  hard 
or  soft,  light  rubbing  answers  the  same  purpose.  It 
will  be  your  first  impression,  that  if  the  beard  is 
thick  and  heavy,  it  will  require  hard  rubbing.  Bear 
In  mind  that  every  man's  face  is  tender  and  should 
be  handled  carefully. 

The  beard  should  be  rubbed  from  two  to  ten  mit 
utes,  according  to  the  growth  of  hair,     Where  the 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


3J 


beard  is  dirty  and  full  of  g-rit,  after  thoroug-hly  rub- 
bing- it,  the  lather  should  be  wiped  off  with  a  wet 
towel  and  a  new  coat  of  lather  applied.  This  will 
only  be  necessary  in  extreme  cases. 

Always  see  that  your  customer  is  in  an  easy,  com- 


LATHERING. 

fortable  position  in  the  chair,  and  do  not  lower  the 
head  rest  enoug-h  to  cramp  the  person's  neck.     The 
skin  must  be  always  left  loose  so  that  it  c^*_  redrawn 
in  any  position  required  while  under  the  razor. 
Do  not  make  the  mistake  of  stropping  your  razor 


THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


when  you  have  nothing-  else  to  do,  thinking-  it  will  be 
leady  for  use  when  you  have  prepared  the  beard.  A 
razor  must  always  be  stropped  just  before  using-  it. 


BACK    HAND. 

The  philosophy  of  this  is,  the  friction  in  stropping- 
heats  the  steel  and  expands  it,  leaving  a  smoother 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


33 


edge  than  the  blade  naturally  has  when  cool.  While 
the  heat  g-iven  the  razor  is  not  the  only  benefit,  it 
explains  the  theory  of  stropping-  just  before  shaving. 
Always  begin  the  shave  on  the  right  hand  side, 
draw  the  razor  with  a  slanting  stroke,  as  shown  in 
cut.  The  razor  must  be  handled  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  allow  it  to  saw  across  the  beard  instead  of  pulling 


FREE  HAND. 

straight.  This  motion  is  what  makes  shaving  an 
art.  The  stroke  will  be  found  very  difficult  for  a  be- 
ginner, but  by  studying  this  motion  while  practicing^ 
much  time  will  be  saved.  After  the  side  of  the  face 
has  been  shaved  as  far  as  the  corner  of  the  mouth,  it 
is  necessary   to   use  what   we  call  the  back   handed 


34  THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL,. 

StiOke  jt'his  is  done  by  turning-  the  hand  as  shown 
in  cut,  and  is  considered  more  difficult  than  the  free 
arm  motion.  In  order  to  master  this,  the  first  exer- 
cise is  to  throw  the  elbow  up  nearly  eyen  with  the 
shoulder,  and  turn  the  back  of  the  hand  directly  from 
you.  The  mistake  is  usually  made  of  crowding  the 
elbow  down  close  to  the  side,  or  allowing"  the  arm  to 
rest  on  the  customer's  chest,  thus  permitting  the 
razor  to  drag  instead  of  being  carried  with  a  gliding 
stroke  from  point  to  heel.  This  stroke  is  used  on  the 
side  of  the  chin,  and  with  the  same  motion  run  down 
to  the  point  of  the  chin,  taking  off  the  balance  of  the 
beard  as  low  as  the  jaw  bone.  From  this  point  the  free 
arm  motion  is  used  ag-ain  on  the  side  of  the  neck  as 
far  down  as  the  grain  runs.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to 
allow  the  razor  to  g^o  against  the  grain.  In  shaving- 
the  lower  part  of  the  neck,  it  will  be  necessary  for 
you  to  step  around  behind  your  chair  and  draw  the 
skin  up  with  the  thumb  and  down  with  the  fingers  as 
shown  in  the  cut,  so  that  it  will  be  perfectly  tight 
on  the  part  of  the  neck  which  is  being  shaved.  You 
are  apt  to  make  a  mistake  by  allowing-  your  fingers 
to  become  damp  and  slippery,  and  haye  difficulty  in 
drawing-  the  skin  tight  under  your  hand.  Be  sure 
that  your  fingers  are  always  dry,  and  the  face  shaved 
clean  as  far  as  you  go,  not  allowing  bits  of  lather  to 
remain  scattered  over  the  shaved  portion  of  the  face. 


FOLLOWING  THE  GRAIN  DOWN. 


BACK   HAND,    LEFT   SIDE. 


ACROSS  CHIN. 


UNDER  LIP. 


SECOND  TIME   OVER. 


THE    BARBERS,  MANUA~  ,  35 

When  the  side  of  the  face  nearest  you  has  been 
shaved,  turn  the  head  on  the  head  rest  by  lifting-  it 
from  underneath,  and  not  pushing-  it  over  as  though 
handling"  a  block  of  wood.  In  shaving-  the  upper  part 
of  the  face  on  the  opposite  side,  it  is  necessary  to 
use  the  back  handed  motion  and  change  to  the  free 
handed  stroke  in  shaving  the  chin.  When  this  is 
completed,  turn  the  face  straight  up, shaving  directly 
across  the  chin  with  the  diagonal  stroke,  then  shave 
underneath  as  far  down  as  the  grain  of  the  hair  runs. 
Next,  turn  the  face  toward  jou  and  shave  the  oppo- 
site side  of  the  neck  down  with  the  back  handed  stroke 
keeping  with  the  g-rain.  Shave  the  lower  part  of  the 
neck  as  was  done  on  the  opposite  side.  This  part 
of  the  shave  is  the  most  particular  and  should  be 
handled  with  the  most  care. 

After  shaving  one  side  of  the  face,  the  razor  should 
be  restropped,  or  even  oftener  if  it  is  not  giving  sat- 
isfaction. It  is  well  to  ask  your  customer  if  the 
razor  hurts  the  face,  as  a  barber  is  never  sure  just 
what  satisfaction  his  work  is  givi^ig.  A  razor  might 
be  cutting  the  beard  nicely,  but  still  rough  enough 
tc  irritate  the  face,  and  this  might  not  be  detected 
by  the  workman . 

Aftercompleting  the  shave  the  first  time  over,  strop 
again.     In  shaving-  the  second  time  over,  with  a  ten 
der  face,  it    is   best   to   take  the  towel  and  wash  the 


36 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


face,  g-etting"  all  the  soap  oif  the  skin  in  order  to  pre- 
vent irritation.  This  will  be  necessary  only  with  ten- 
der faces.     Wet  the  hand  by   using-  water  bottle  as 


HOI^DING  THE  RAZOR  AND  WATER    BOTTI^E. 

shown  in  cut.     Wet  one  side  of  the  face  at  a  time  with 
your  hand  and  shave  the  second  time  oyer  side  ways 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  37 

to  the  grain,  and  not  directly  ag^ainst  it  as  many  bar- 
bers have  been  taught  to  do.  Never,  under  any  circum- 
stances, shave  up  under  the  jaw  bone  against  the 
g-rain  as  few  faces  can  stand  this  torture  when  they 
indulge  in  a  shave  of  tener  than  once  or  twice  a  week. 
This  work  can  be  done  without  any  extreme  pain  on 
ordinary  faces,  but  it  soon  leads  to  irritation,  in- 
grown hairs  and  eruptions  of  the  skin. 

It  is  the  custom  of  most  men  who  shave  eyery  day 
or  every  other  day  to  shave  but  once  over.  Few  men 
want  a  close  shave,  but  every  man  wants  it  smooth 
and  even.  Do  not  leave  rough  patches,  and  do  as 
little  work  as  possible  the  second  time  over.  Many 
ways  are  in  vogue  for  washing-  and  drying  the  face 
after  the  shave.  The  best  care  that  can  be  taken 
of  the  tender  face  is  to  apply  two  or  three  hot  towels. 
Fold  the  towels  in  such  a  way  that  they  can  be 
drawn  over  the  face  and  allowed  to  remain  and  steam 
to  soak  the  face.  This  removes  all  inflammation  and 
unpleasant  feeling.  After  washing  the  face  includ- 
ing- the  forehead  and  eyes,  in  this  manner,  apply 
either  bay  rum  or  witch  hazel,  never  both  Bay  rum 
will  smart  while  witch  hazel  is  cooling  and  soothing. 
The  customer  should  always  have  his  choice  of  cos- 
metics. Dry  the  face  by  first  placing-  towel  oyer  the 
face  and  rubbing  the  hands  over  the  towel,  then  take 
up  the  towel  and  dry  the  face  as  you  would  in  wip- 


38  THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL. 

ing^  your  own  face,  using-  care  that  the  towel  is  never 
wiped  over  the  face  against  the  grain.  Be  cautious 
in  drying-  around  the  ears  and  corners  of  the  mouth 
and  be  sure  to  dry  the  entire  face  thoroughly  before 
fanning  it  to  prevent  chapping.  Apply  magnesia  or 
powder  either  by  rubbing  the  towel  over  the  lump  of 
magnesia  and  applying-  to  the  face  or  by  using  the 
powder  can.  Sifter  top  can  is  usually  preferable, 
then  wipe  the  powder  all  off  from  the  face  as  it  is 
only  applied  to  give  it  a  smooth  feeling-  and  to  pre- 
vent a  glossy  appearance  of  the  skin. 

This  concludes  the  shave  proper,  but  after  setting- 
Ihe  custcner  up  in  the  chair  complete  your  work  by 
combing  the  hair,  curling  the  mustache,  if  required, 
and  such  details  as  the  customer  may  request. 

Many  old  barbers  make  the  mistake  of  not  using 
g-ood  judgment  in  combing.  Observe  the  style  your 
customer  has  been  combed  before,  and  try  and  comb 
the  hair  as  nearly  like  it  as  possible.  By  studying 
these  rules  carefully  much  time  can  be  saved  in  a 
term  of  schooling,  but  some  study  will  be  necessary 
to  get  the  full  benefit  of  them. 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL,.  39 


PART  V. 
HAIR-CUTTING. 

Skill  in  hair-cuttingf  is  attained  by  a  study  of 
styles  and  by  an  opportunity  for  constant  practice. 
No  one  can  become  a  skillful  hair-cutter  without  con- 
stant attention  to  the  work  and  there  must  be  an 
opportunity  for  constant  practice.  Here  is  where  the 
greatest  disadvantage  is  found  in  theold  style  barber 
shop  apprenticeship.  Men  who  pay  for  a  good  hair- 
cut or  a  shave,  naturally  object  to  being  made  sub- 
jects tor  a  novice  to  practice  upon,  consequently  the 
student  who  has  no  one  to  practice  upon  has  no 
chance  for  advancement. 

It  usually  requires  from  two  to  three  years  to  be- 
come proficient  in  this  work.  However,  the  same 
thing  can  be  learned  in  two  or  three  months  with  the 
proper  opportunities  before  you.  No  one  can  learn 
this  work  or  any  part  of  it  by  seeing  it  done.  \t  is 
necessary  to  apply  yourself  to  this  work  constantly 
until  you  have  thoroughly  mastered  the  different 
styles,  and  the  art  of  handling  the  shears  and  comb 
have  become  a  second  nature  to  you.     There  can  be 


40  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

as  much  genius  displayed  in  the  work  as  in  the  work 
of  the  sculptor  or  the  painter.  Expression  can  be 
displayed  on  the  back  of  the  head  as  well  as  in  the 
face.  As  the  sculptor  moulds  here  and  there  for 
expression  and  character,  so  a  slig^ht  touch  with  the 
shears  and  comb  in  the  proper  place,  will  display 
graceful  or  awkward  outlines.  It  is  the  barber,  but 
not  the  clothes  that  make  the  man.  No  amount  of 
reading-  or  study  will  reveal  this  art,  althoug-h  you 
will  be  helped  by  suggestions  and  examples  per- 
formed before  you.  Observe  closely  the  fashion 
plates  and  directions  that  follow. 

Probably  the  mos*  simple  of  all  hair-cuts  is  the 
"full  crown."  This  style  is  ordinarily  intended  lor 
boys  from  ten  to  fifteen  years  old,  but  should  be 
given  whenever  r^^^nested. 

It  is  made  by  using  the  clippers  up  to  the  crown  of 
the  head,  thus  leaving  only  the  top  of  the  head  un- 
dipped. Some  experience  is  necessary  in  order  to 
handle  clippers  properly.  The  greatest  difficulty  will 
be  in  allowing  the  handles  the  full  stroke,  for  the  ap- 
prentice, in  nearly  every  instance,  cramps  his  hand 
and  thereby  allows  the  machine  only  about  half  of 
its  action.  Be  sure  that  it  is  given  the  full  stroke  to 
prevent  clogging  of  the  hair. 

After  the  clipper  work  is  completed,  then  trim  the 
edge  which  remains,  after  the  use  of  the  machine,  so 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  41 

that  it  is  impossible  to  see  how  high  the  clippers  were 
used.  After  the  edges  have  been  evenly  trimmed, 
cut  the  top  of  the  hair  between  the  fingers  as  shown 
in  diagram.  With  this  style,  hair  must  be  left  long- 
est in  front,  and  should  gradually  taper  down  to  the 
short  hair  at  the  crown  and  on  the  sides  of  the  head. 

In  making  the  outlines  of  the  haircut,  which  is  the 
last  and  most  noticeable  part  of  your  work,  care 
must  be  taken  to  make  the  lines  graceful.  You 
should  begin  at  the  sifle  of  the  head  and  in  front  of 
the  ear  and  cut  either  straight  down  the  back  of 
the  neck,  on  each  side,  or  cut  around  as  the  customer 
desires.  Always  ask  your  customer  which  style  he 
prefers.  The  outline  made  by  the  points  of  the  shears 
signifies  the  line  to  which  you  should  shave,  and  this 
outline  should  be  made  true  and  even. 
HALF    CROWN. 

For  the  style  known  as  the  half  crown  cut,  clippers 
should  be  used  only  half  way  to  the  crown  of  the 
head  or  a  little  above  the  ears.  The  line  left  by  the 
clippers  should  be  straight  around  and  not  be  allowed 
to  run  down  at  the  back  of  the  head,  as  many  barbers 
do  with  this  style  of  cut.  After  completing  the  clip- 
per work,  trim  the  remaining  edges  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  the  full  crown  cut,  giving  a  gradual 
tapei  to  the  hair,  and  so  cutting  out  the  clipper  mark 
that  it  cannot  be  noticed  how  high  the  clippers  were 


42 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAI,. 


used.  The  top  of  the  hair  should  be  cut  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  the  crown  cut,  but  the  proper  propor- 
tion must  be  maintained.     It   will  be   necessary   to 


TRIMMING  FULL  CROWN. 

leaye  tne  hair  a  little  longer  than  in  the  full  crown 
cut.  The  usual  mistake  in  this  style  is  in  leaving 
the  hair  too  bunchy  at   the  crown  making  it  appear 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


43 


i>trLI.  CROWN  COMPLETED. 


44 


THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


HALF   CKOWN  CUT. 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  4r^ 

as  thoug-h  a  wig  had  been  placed  on  too  of  the  head. 
Study  the  fashion  plate  for  this  style. 

HAIR  TRIM. 

The  style  that  is  known  as  the  trim  may  be  di- 
vided into  three  lengths,  the  short,  the  medium  and 
the  long-  trim.  All  are  cut  the  same,  but  the  length 
of  the  hair  should  be  gauged  according  to  the  custom- 
er's taste.    For  this  style,  clippers  are  not  used  at  all. 

It  is  best  to  begin  on  the  side  of  the  head  and  not 
at  the  back  as  many  barbers  do.  The  advantag^e  of 
beginning-  on  a  side  and  working  around  is,  that  it 
saves  time  and  extra  work.  Hair  should  always  be 
shortest  at  the  lower  edge  and  gradually  taper  to  the 
longer  hair  at  the  crown  of  the  head. 

The  ordidary  or  medium  length  is  the  style  worn 
by  most  men  nowadays,  and  in  this  cut  it  is  necessary 
to  become  the  most  proficient.  Cut  with  the  shears 
and  comb  about  two-thirds  of  the  way  to  the  crown. 
After  you  have  grone  clear  around  the  head,  begin 
where  you  left  off  with  the  shears  and  comb,  and  cut 
through  the  fingers  from  the  front  toward  the  back. 
Care  should  be  taken  not  to  g-et  the  hair  too  short 
at  the  crown.  This  is  apt  to  happen  unless  you  take 
particular  pains  to  avoid  it.  After  haying  gon^  over 
the  top  of  the  head  do  not  make  the  mistake  of  cut- 
ting around  the  forehead  the  same  as  with  ^  woman's 


46  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

bangs-  The  ends  of  the  hair  at  the  forehead  should 
ouiy  ce  trimmed  slightly,  comb  all  the  hair  to  one 
side.  This  will  allow  the  ends  of  the  hair  to  remain 
in  the  position  the  hair  will  be  when  parted.  Trim 
both  ^ides  alike  so  that  the  hair  can  be  parted  any- 
where without  leaving  ragged  edges  on  either  side. 
It  is  often  the  case  that  barbers  part  the  hair  before 
trimming  the  ends.  Avoid  making  this  ^nistake,  for 
if  both  sides  are  not  trimmed  exactly  alike,  the  next 
time  the  hair  is  parted,  if  it  is  not  parted  in  exactly 
the  same  place,  ragged  ends  will  appear  on  one  side 
or  the  other.  In  making  the  outline,  you  will  find 
the  work  for  this  style  of  hair-cut  more  difficult  than 
with  the  crown  or  half  crown  cut. 

COLLEGE  CUT. 

Comb  the  hair  from  the  crown  evenly  in  all  direc- 
tions, making  a  false  crown  at  the  center  of  the  head. 
Trim  the  lower  part  of  the  hair  the  same  as  outlin- 
ing for  the  ordinary  or  medium  trim.  Keep  combing 
and  trimming  the  edge  until  it  is  perfectly  even, and 
shows  no  ragged  edge.  This  will  allow  the  hair,  as  it 
continues  to  grow,  to  have  a  massive  or  bulky  ap- 
pearance, and  will  leave  it  round  and  smooth,  with 
no  marks  of  the  shears  to  show.  By  trimming  the 
lower  edges  you  shorten  the  hair  underneath,  giving 


THK  BAKBKRS'  MANUAI,. 


47 


COI,I,«GE   CUT— SIDE   VIEW. 


48  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAIy. 


COLIvEGE  CUT— BACK  VIEW. 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  49 

the  effects  as  shown  in  the  cuts  on  pages  47  and  48. 

It  may  be  trimmed  with  the  Eng-lish  bang-  as  shown 
in  the  side  view  or  as  the  ordinary  trim.  The  hair, 
when  combed  straight  down  from  the  forehead,  must 
be  trimmed  even  with  the  lower  edge. 

POMPADOUR  HAIR-CUT. 

This  style  is  little  worn  now,  but  no  barber  can  call 
himself  proficient  without  having  mastered  this  par- 
ticular style.  There  was  a  time  when  it  was  consid- 
ered the  most  difficult  of  all  cuts,  but  it  is  now  con- 
sidered as  easy  as  any.  The  hair  should  be  clipped 
the  same  as  in  the  crown  cut,  then  wet  the  brush  and 
comb  the  hair  straight  up,  using  the  comb  just  ahead 
of  the  brush.  This  will  prevent  the  hair  from  ly- 
ing down  flat  and  will  put  it  in  a  proper  position  to 
be  trimmed.  Trim  the  edges  left  by  the  clippers,  but 
avoid  getting  deep  into  the  hair. 

After  the  edges  are  trimmed  on  both  sides,  start 
directly  in  the  middle  in  front,  and  work  back.  In 
this  way  you  have  a  better  line  to  be  guided  by  for 
the  balance  of  the  trim.  Your  mistakes  will  be  in 
trimming  off  too  much  of  the  sides,  thereby  making 
it  round.  See  that  the  hair  has  a  gradual  slope  from 
the  front  back  to  the  crown;  Use  the  same  care  i< 
outlining  a*  with  the  other  style. 


POMPADOUR. 


child's  trim  with  bangs. 


CHILD  S   DUTCH    CUT. 


50  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAI,. 


PART  VI. 

BEARD  TRIMMING. 
VAN  DYKE  BEARD. 

In  most  cases,  the  beard  is  trimmed  short,  using  the 
clippers  to  the  corners  of  the  mouth,  leaving  only  the 
chin  undipped.  Next  trim  with  the  shears,  then 
comb  the  edge  of  the  beard  which  remains  after  the 
use  of  the  clipper  and  gradually  work  to  a  point, 
funnel  shaped  at  the  point  of  the  chin.  Great  care 
must  be  taken  to  have  the  work  smooth  underneath, 
the  chin,  so  that  the  beard,  when  the  head  is  in  an  up- 
right position,  will  show  no  ragged  edges  at  the 
bottom.  You  should  always  be  cautious  about  trim- 
ming near  the  edge  of  the  upper  lip,  as  the  hair  usual- 
ly grows  thin  on  that  part  of  the  face,  and  a  verj' 
little  trimming  will  show  the  bare  spots. 

In  order  to  have  the  points  exactly  in  the  center  it  ic 
necessary  to  trim  on  both  sides,  first  on  the  one  and 
then  on  the  other,  and  you  must  not  finish  one  side 
before  beginning  on  the  other.  In  case  the  customer 
does  ./ot  want  the  side  of  the  face  and  neck  clipped, 
trim  closely  with  the  shears,  leaving  the  same  length 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 


51 


THK   VAN    DYKE    BEARD. 


52  THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

of  beard  andg-iviugf  no  proportion  until  you  reach  the 
corner  of  the  mouth,  then  trim  it  to  a  point  the  same 
as  when  clippers  are  used.  This  is  a  business  or  pro- 
fessional man's  beard  trim,  often  called  the  "Napo- 
leon," and  you  should  be  cautious  in  adapting- it  for 
the  minister  or  for  elderly  gentlemen. 

THE  PARTED  BEARD. 

This  style  of  beards  is  little  worn  nowadays,  but 
those  who  possess  a  parted  beard  like  those  who  wear 
the  pompadour  hair-cut,  are  particular  about  its  ap- 
pearance. It  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  trims  in  the 
barber  business. 

The  beard  should  first  be  parted  in  the  center  and 
combed  out  toward  each  side.  The  hair  should  then 
be  trimmed  closely  on  the  neck  either  with  the  shears 
or  with  the  clippers,  and  gradually  taper  to  the  longer 
hair  on  the  sides  of  the  face.  This  beard  is  directly 
opposite  to  the  Van  Dyke  and  is  meant  to  broaden 
the  expression  of  the  face  and  not  to  lengthen  it. 

The  beard  on  the  side  of  the  face  should  usually 
be  trimmed  down  until  it  is  about  half  an  inch  long 
until  near  the  chin,  where  it  should  grow  longer  as  in 
the  cut  In  any  style  of  beard  trim,  care  must  be 
taken  to  have  the  hair  trimmed  closely  on  the  neck. 
More  work  is  necessary  on  this  style  of  trim  than 
the  ordinary  hair-cut,  and  this  is  a  part  of  the  work 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL.  S3 


THE   PARTED   BEARD. 


54  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

that  you  receive  the  least  practice  on.  Few  barbers 
are  expert  beard  trimmers.  The  CoUeg^e  offers  a 
splendid  opportunity  for  practice  in  this  work  as  well 
as  all  others. 

There  are  many  other  styles  of  wearing  the  beard, 
such  as  the  "Mutton  Chops,'*  chin  whiskers,  etc.  No 
skill  is  required  in  trimming-  these,  and  the  only  care 
necessary  must  be  displayed  in  blocking-  out  a  new 
beard,  getting  both  sides  even  and  always  following 
the  directions  of  your  customer,  as  there  are  as 
many  styles  in  blocking  out  whiskers  as  you  hav<» 
customers  to  wait  upon. 


THE   BARBERS,  MANUAL. 
PART  VII. 


55 


SHAMPOO. 


There  are  various  methods  of  shampooing-,  al- 
though all  are  practically  the  same  in  the  end,  the 
only  difference  being-  in  the  substance  or  material 
used   in  giying-   the    shampoo.     The    material    most 


fayored  now  is   shampoo    jelly.     It  is   a   substance 
which  foams  readily,  is  mild,  cleansing,  and  health- 
ful to  the  scalp. 
In  preparing  for  the  shampoo,  place  a  towel  above 


%  THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL. 

the  hair  cloth,  both  in  front  and  back;  to  prever' 
wetting-  the  customers  collar  and  clothes.  About  . 
thimbleful  of  the  shampoo  jellj'  is  sufficient  for  an  or- 
dinary shampoo.  Take  the  shampoo  jelly  in  the  left 
hand  and  the  water  bottle  in  the  right  hand,  apply 
water  and  rub  the  shampoo  into  the  hair.  This  pro- 
duces a  liffht  lather,  and  when  sufficient  water  has 
been  used  to  chang-e  the  jelly  to  a  lather,  set  the  bottle 
down  and  rub  with  both  hands  as  in  cut.  Avoid  rub- 
bing- with  both  hands  in  the  same  direction  at  the 
same  time  as  this  would  be  uncomfortable  for  the  cus- 
tomer. Let  each  hand  operate  opposite  to  the  other 
Rub  with  the  balls  of  the  fing-ers  and  do  not  scratch 
the  scalp  with  the  fing-er  nails.  Rub  hard  or  lig-ht  as 
suits  the  customer,  usually  rubbing-  the  scalp  about 
five  or  ten  minutes,  then  prepare  the  shampoo  stand 
and  bowl. 

Regulate  the  temperature  of  the  water  before  get- 
ting- your  customer  over  to  the  shampoo  bowl. 
Where  you  have  no  water  connections  procure  a  suf- 
ficient amount  of  water  at  the  proper  temperature 
(luke  warm)  in  some  convenient  dish  in  order  to  pour 
over  the  head.  When  everything-  is  in  readiness,  have 
your  r-'stomer  step  from  the  chair  to  the  shampoo 
stand,  and  force  him  to  lean  over  far  enoug-b  so  that 
the  water  will  not  run  down  his  neck,  while  washing- 
the  lather  from  his  head.     See  that  the  soap  is  thor- 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  57 

DUghly  rinsed  from  the  hair  and  that  the  scalp  is 
well  cleansed.  Avoid  letting  your  customer  raise  his 
head  up  as  soon  as  you  have  completed  pouring  on 
water  or  using  the  spray.  Shake  the  water  out  of  the 
hair  as  much  as  possible  before  using  the  towels,  then 
dry  the  hair  enough  so  the  water  will  not  run  down 
the  neck  when  the  customer  raises  his  head  up.  Be 
careful  not  to  get  lather  in  the  customer's  eyes. 

After  the  face  has  been  wiped  place  your  customer 
again  in  the  chair  and  dry  the  hair  thoroughly  with 
the  towel.  In  drying  the  hair  do  not  place  the  towel 
over  the  head  in  such  a  way  that  the  ends  will  fly 
around  in  the  customer's  face  or  eyes.  Handle  the 
towel  so  that  the  ends  will  be  kept  at  the  back  of  the 
head  instead  of  in  the  face.  Towels  without  fringe 
are  preferable.  The  size  of  the  towels  should  be  16x28 
inches.  This  is  the  most  convenient  size  for  shav- 
ing or  shampooing.  Do  not  try  to  dry  the  hair  by 
fanning  as  this  leaves  the  hair  stiff  and  harsh.  Al- 
ways rub  until  thoroughly  dry,  thereby  making  it 
light,  loose  and  fluffy. 

EGG  SHAMPOO. 

For  an  egg  shampoo  use  a  fresh  egg,  break  the  end 
sufficiently  to  allow  the  white  to  come  out  a  little  at 
a  time  and  rub  thoroughly  through  the  hair.     After 


oi  THE   BARBERS'  MANUAI,. 

rubbing  the  head  well  the  same  as  with  the  shanipw^ 
jelly,  wash  the  hair  out  the  same  as  in  the  ordinary 
shampoo,  but  apply  a  little  soap  or  jelly  when  you 
are  rinsing  the  hair. 

An  egg  shampoo  is  supposed  to  leaye  the  hair  in  a 
better  condition  than  any  other  kind  of  a  shampoo. 

ALCOHOL  SHAMPOO. 

An  alcohol  shampoo  is  the  same  as  an  ordinary 
one  with  the  exception  of  rubbing  alcohol  through 
the  hair  after  drying  it. 

From  fifteen  to  twenty-five  minutes  is  usually 
necessary  for  giving  a  good  shampoo.  Men  pay  more 
for  a  shampoo  than  for  a  sea  foam,  and  it  is  the  work 
attached  to  it  that  makes  it  more  expensive.  Too 
many  barbers  are  accustomed  to  slighting  this  work, 
which  requires  as  much  pains  as  any  part  of  the 
barber  business.  A  man  may  receive  a  bath  for  the 
same  price  that  he  pays  for  a  shampoo,  and  if  it 
was  simply  for  cleansing  the  head  all  customers 
would  take  a  bath  in  preference  to  paying  simply 
for  having  the  head  cleaned. 

A  shampoo  is  not  properly  done  unless  the  hair  is 
well  rubbed  and  thoroughly  dried. 

DRY  SHAMPOO. 

Dry  shampoo  can  be  given  the  same  as  an  ordinary 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL,.  W 

shampoo,  using-  the  shampoo  jelly  or  a  shampoo  bar, 
but  the  hair  should  be  washed  out  by  using  wet 
towels  instead  of  taking- the  customer  to  the  shampoo 
stand.  Use  a  towel  wet  enough  to  wash  the  lather 
out  of  the  hair,  and  rinse  your  towel  three  or  four 
times  while  cleaning  the  scalp.  Dry  the  hair  the 
same  as  before. 

SEA-FOAM. 

Sea-foam  answers  the  same  purpose  as  a  shampoo, 
but  it  requires  less  work.  The  material  used  is  a 
liquid.  Apply  it  to  the  hair  the  same  as  water  and 
rub  the  head  vigorously.  Apply  a  sufficient  amount 
to  wet  the  hair  thoroughly  and  by  rubbing^  well,  it 
will  cause  it  to  foam  and  evaporate.  After  a  liberal 
foam  has  been  obtained,  rub  with  both  hands  as  in  a 
shampoo  until  entirely  evaporated.  Then  take  a  wet 
towel  and  rinse  out  the  hair  the  same  as  in  the  dry 
shampoo.  Less  time  and  less  work  is  required  in 
g-iving^  a  sea-foam  and  a  smaller  price  is  charged  for 
it.  Sea-foam  is  very  cleansing,  but  less  beneficial  to 
the  scalp  than  the  shampoo.  It  removes  dandruff  for 
a  time,  but  is  more  apt  to  create  a  growth  of  dan- 
druff than  to  destroy  it. 

SINGEING. 

Singeing  is  to  promote  the  growth  of  the  hair.     By 


60 


THE  BARBERS"  MANUAL. 


burning- the  ends  after  it  has  been  cut  it  closes  the 
pores  of  the  hair  keeping-  the  fluid  in  and  preventing 
the  ends  from  splitting.     It  is  one  of  the  best  remedies 


SINGEING 

for  falling  hair  and  it  strengthens  the  growth.     Hair 
can  be  singed  at  any  length. 

Use  a   singeing    taper  or    gas    light  taper   in   the 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  61 

right  hand,  with  the  comb  in  the  left,  and  for  short 
hair,  singe  over  the  comb  as  in  cut.  Where  the  hair 
is  long,  singe  over  the  fingers  the  same  as  in  cutting 
long  hair.  This  work  is  very  simple  after  you  have 
learned  to  trim, still  it  is  a  very  important  and  a  neces- 
sary qualification  for  the  barber.  The  most  pains 
should  be  taken  around  the  crown  and  forehead  as 
these  are  the  parts  where  the  hair  is  apt  to  fall  out 
and  needs  the  most  strengthening.  In  singeing  the 
back  of  the  neck,  use  the  comb  above  the  blaze  to  pre- 
vent the  fire  from  running  up  and  catching  the  hair 
above  the  singer.  This  is  the  only  difficult  part  of 
singeing. 

DYEING  HAIR. 

The  different  formulas  and  preparations  for  dye- 
ing hair  are  numerous,  although  there  is  but  one  kind 
used  to  any  extent  by  the  barber.  This  is  called  Dye 
No.  1  and  No.  2,  called  so  from  the  fact  that  it  is  in 
two  parts,  or  two  bottles,  labeled  Nos.  1  and  2.  This 
is  the  only  instantaneous  dye  we  have,  and  for  this 
reason  is  the  one  preferred  by  the  barber.  It  is  sel- 
dom used  in  dyeing  the  entire  hair  or  whiskers  but  is 
the  universal  application  for  the  mustache.  Dyeing 
the  mustache  is  but  little  practiced  nowadays,  but  it 
is  very  important  that  the  barber  should  know  how. 


62 


THE   BARBEUS'  MANUAL, 


for  serving-  customers  with  this  part  of  the  work  leads 
to  other  trade. 

In  dyeing,  no  matter  what  kind  of  dye  is  used,  first 
thoroughly  clean  the  hair  or  mustache.  Sea-foam  is 
the  best  to  use  for  this  purpose  as  it  dries  quickest. 
After  the  hair  is  thoroughly  cleaned  apply  No.  1, 
either  with  the  fingers  or  tooth  brush.  No.  1  simply 
prepares  the  hair  for  the  dye,   and  does  not  color  or 


effect  the  skin.  After  drying  No.  1  by  fanning:  (not 
rubbing)  apply  No.  2  with  a  small  brush,  using  it 
over  the  comb  as  shown  in  cut. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  in  dyeing  the  mustache 
or  hair,  to  have  a  very  little  of  the  material  ca  the 
brush  so  as  to  prevent  its  running  onto  the  skin,  "^he 
most  difficult  part  of  this  work  is  getting  close  to  the 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUALr.  63 

roots  of  the  hair  without  touching-  the  flesh.  When 
the  dye  is  once  on  it  cannot  be  washed  out,  even 
with  soap  or  ammonia,  and  it  is  obliged  to  remain 
until  worn  off. 

"Where  other  kinds  of  dye  are  used  they  are  applied 
the  same  as  No.  2,  first  by  cleansing-  the  hair  and 
applying  the  fluid,  but  these  dyes  do  not  change  the 
color  of  the  hair  immediately.  Twenty-four  hours  is 
usually  required  for  all  other  dyes  to  do  their  work. 
Any  number  of  applications  can  be  had  according-  to 
the  color  required,  each  application  making-  the  hair 
a  little  darker,  but  with  Nos.  1  and  2  it  is  immediately- 
dyed  black.     No  other  color  can  be  obtained. 

BIvEACHING  HAIR. 

Hair  may  be  bleached  from  dark  to  light  by  using 
a  solution  of  Hydrogen  of  Peroxide. 

For  bleaching-,  first  clean  the  hair  the  same  as  for 
dyeing-,  and  apply  the  bleach  in  the  same  way  as  you 
apply  the  dye,  being  careful  to  keep  it  off  from  the 
flesh.  As  many  applications  can  be  applied  as  re- 
quired, each  application  changing-  the  color  of  the 
hair  a  few  shades  lighter.  Twenty-four  hours'  time 
is  required  after  the  application  to  change  the  color 
of  the  hair 


64  THE    BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

PRICES. 

Too  often  the  mistake  is  made  by  beginners  in  this 
work,  who  think  they  will  obtain  more  practice  and 
as  gfood  profits,  by  cutting-  prices.  No  g-reater  error 
could  be  made  and  the  writer  would  advise  any  man 
contemplating  this  profession  as  a  life  work  to  aban- 
don the  work  entirely  if  the  regulation  prices  cannot 
be  had.  Nearly  any  line  of  day  labor  will  be  found  as 
lucrative  as  cheap  barber  work,  if  not  quite  as  easy. 
Your  time  and  money  spent  in  mastering-  this  pro- 
fession is  putting  you  in  possession  of  a  serviceable 
trade  and  your  place  cannot  be  filled  by  the  ordinary 
laborer.  It  is  one  that  commands  and  receives  good 
prices  for  good  services,  and  no  one  will  be  benefitted 
by  inferior  work  at  cut  rates. 

The  average  prices  for  barbering-  are  as  follows: 

Hair-cutting 2Sc 

Honing  Razors 2Sc 

Singe 25c 

Beard  Trimming 25c 

Shampoo 25c 

Mustache  Dye 25c 

Sea-foam 10c 

Shaye . .  10c. 

Dyeing  the  entire  head  of  hair  should  be 
charg-ed  for  according    to  the  length  of  the  hair    and 


THE    BARBERS,  MANUAL.  65 

material  required  for  doing^  it,  usually  frota  $1.00  to 
$2  00  is  the  regulation  price  for  hair  or  whiskers. 

In  giving-  a  shave  where  it  is  requested  that  the  back 
of  the  neck  be  shaved  it  is  usually  customary  to 
charge  fiye  cents  extra.  For  these  prices  the  best 
brands  of  cosmetics  should  be  used. 


MISCELIvANEOUS   BRIEJES. 

Do  not  go  out  looking  for  employment  at  this  work 
without  a  clean  shaye,  clean  linen  and  a  shine.  Your 
personal  appearance  has  as  much  to  do  with  holding 
positions  as  your  work  itself. 

Neatness.  Careful  work.  Politeness  to  customers. 
Speed  comes  by  practice.  Never  hurry  unless  re- 
quested to.  Do  not  seek  to  increase  trade  by  cutting 
prices.  I^ady  hairdressing-  is  an  accomplishment  no 
barber  can  afford  to  be  without.  A  well  regulated 
barber  shop  should  have  the  air  of  a  parlor  and  its 
workmen  the  courtesy  of  a  reception  committee. 

A  very  essential  thing  of  the  barber  profession  is 
Dermatology,  a  science  which  deals  with  the  treat- 
ment of  hair,  scalp  and  skin  diseases.  A  full  course 
of  lectures  delivered  to  the  students  of  our  Barber 
College  by  Dr.  B.  Franklin  Tolson,  L,.  L,.  B.,  M.  D.,  is 
given  in  our  Ready  Reference  Guide,  which  also  con- 


G6  THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

tains  eig-hty  select  formulas  for  all  cosmetics  used  in 
the  barber  shop.     Price  25  cents. 

It  is  customary  to  leave  a  razor  or  some  security 
for  your  position  if  you  are  not  irn  mediately  ready  to 
g^o  to  work.  After  securing-  the  position  it  will  always 
be  expected  of  you  to  keep  work-stand,  chair  and 
glass  neatly  arranged  and  clean.  A  barber  is  not 
usually  expected  to  take  care  of  the  shop  further 
than  this,  althoug-h  in  small  places,  where  there  are 
no  porters,  it  is  customary  for  the  barber  to  help  care 
for  the  shop. 

FORMULAS. 

HAIR  TONIC  (BALDNESS.) 

Tinct.  capsicum 2  drs. 

Water  ammonia  ( 10  per  cent) 1  oz. 

Pilocarpine  hydrochlorate 5  grs. 

Colog-ne 3  ozs. 

Use  on  scalp  twice  a  day. 

HAIR  TONIC. 

Tr.  Cantharides 4  drs. 

lyiq.  Ammonia 4  drs. 

Rose  Water 2  ozs. 

Glycerine 4  ozs. 

Bay  Rum 10  ozs. 


THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL.  57 

REMEDY  FOR  DANDRUFF. 

Resorcin 5  to  10  parts. 

Castor  Oil 45  parts. 

Alcohol 150  parts. 

Balsam  of  Peru  0  5  part. 

Rub  in  daily  with  a  piece  of  flannel. 

HAIR  DYE. 

No.  1. 

Gallic  acid 20  ffrs- 

Alcohol 5  dr>.. 

Water 2  drs. 

No.  2. 

Silver  nitrate 1  dr. 

Ammonia 3  drs. 

Gum  arabic . .  30  grs. 

Water 6  drs . 

Dissolve   the   silver  nitrate   in  the  ammonia   and 
the  g"um  arabic  in  the  water.     Then  mix. 

SHAMPOO  PASTE. 

White  soft  soap 4  ozs. 

Honey  soap,  in  shavings 2  ozs. 

Oliye  oil 1  fl.  oz. 

Water 1  fl.  oz. 

Potassium  carbonate 1  dr. 

Melt  all  together  and  beat  into  paste.     May  be  per- 
fumed if  desired. 


68  THE   BARBERS'  MANUAL. 

IMPROVED  SEA-FOAM. 

Alcohol 16  ozs 

Water 16  ozs. 

Aqua  ammonia ...      1  dr, 

Cologne  water 1  dr. 

HAIR  BLEACH. 
The  best  preparation  for  this  purpose  is  Peroxide  of 
Hydrogen. 

BAY  RUM. 

Jamaica  rum 16  ozs. 

Rect.  spts 64  ozs. 

Water 48  ozs. 

Mix  and  add: 

Oil  of  bay 1  oz. 

BARBER  COLLEGE  BRILLIANTINE. 

Castor  oil 1  oz. 

Alcohol  absolute 2  oz. 

Oil  of  rose Q .  S. 

Oil  of  neroli Q.  S 

This  makes  a  gooJ  preparation  and  is  practically 
inseparable. 

BARBERS'  POWDER. 

Salol 1  dr. 

Starch , 2  oz 

Mix  and  make  a  powder. 


THE    BARBERS'  MANUAI^  69 

HAIR  POMADE. 

Lard 4  lbs. 

Yellow  wax 3  oz. 

Palm  oil 1  oz. 

Melt,  strain,  and  add  while  stirring-: 

Rose  water 4  ozs. 

Oil  berg-amot 1  oz. 

OINTME^NT  FOR  BARBER'S  ITCH. 

Tannic  acid , 15  gr. 

Sulphur,  precipitated Yz  dr. 

Petrolatum 5  drs. 

GLYCERINE   FACE   LOTION. 

Mucilage  of  Flaxseed 8  fl  oz 

Glycerine 8 

Alcohol 2 

Essence  of  rose Yz 

Borax 2 

Rose  water,  sufficient  to  make 32 

VIOLET   WATER. 

Essence   Violet,  French's 8  oz 

Deodorized   Alcohol 7  pints 

Rose   water    1  pint 

Mix  and  filter. 


70  THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

MEN'S  FACIAL  AND  SCALP   MASSAGE.  , 

Recently  Men's  Facial  Massage  has  become  as  popu- 
lar in  the  barber  shops  as  any  work  that  he  is  called 
upon  to  do  and  one  that  affords  a  splendid  revenue, 
if  the  skill  and  equipment  for  this  department  is  as 
carefully  looked  after  as  the  other  branches.  This  is 
a  profession  that  is  more  a  matter  of  study  and  demon- 
stration than  of  practice.  It  differs  from  the  other 
branches  of  the  business  inasmuch  as  the  high  efficiency 
in  mechanical  skill  is  not  required,  but  a  knowledge  of 
the  muscles  of  the  face,  their  development  and  manipu- 
lations require  a  careful  understandmg. 

Man}^  methods  of  doing  this  work  are  employed, 
usually  varying  according  to  the  facilities  obtainable. 
We  have  divided  the  work  into  three  divisions,  i.  e., 
Vibratory,  Electric  and  Finger  manipulations,  so  that 
one  or  the  other  can  be  used  in  any  locality  or  under 
any  circumstances  that  may  exist.  The  training  of 
our  System  of  Colleges  includes  all  three  of  these 
methods  so  that  one  is  qualified  to  take  up  the  work 
in  any  establishment,  or  satisfy  any  employer,  no  mat- 
ter what  method  he  may  adopt. 

Massaging  is  done  for  the  purpose  of  eradicating 
wrinkles,  black  heads,  pimples  and  other  facial  blem- 
ishes,   as    well    as    to    clear    the    complexion,    develop 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  71 

shrunken  muscles,  fill  out  hollow  cheeks  and  harden 
flabby  skin.  It  is  a  treatment  recommended  by  physi- 
cians and  if  followed  out  according  to  the  instructions 
laid  down  here,  will  produce  surprising  results.  While 
every  face  will  require  the  same  general  principle,  they 
must  be  varied  to  suit  each  particular  subject.  On 
account  of  the  beardy  surface,  men's  facial  massage  is 
taken  up  by  entirely  a  different  set  of  manipulations 
than  is  used  for  ladies'  work,  so  that  one  cannot  follow- 
out  the  same  system  for  both  sex. 

APPARATUS      REQUIRED      FOR      VIBRATORY 
AND     ELECTRIC     MASSAGE.. 

Probably  the  most  popular  instrument  now  in  use  in 
connection  with  the  facial  massage  is  the  Vibrator,  of 
which  there  are  a  great  many  patterns  and  different 
manufactures,  all  working  on  the  one  general  principle 
of  rapid  vibrations  to  stimulate  the  circulations  and 
exercise  the  muscles  by  kneading  and  manipulating. 
Among  the  higher  priced  machines,  are  those  that  are 
constructed  to  operate  a  number  of  different  styles  of 
movements  thus  savmg  time  that  would  be  required  by 
the  hand  process. 

The  machines  are  operated  by  electricity,  water  power 
and  in  some  instances  by  storage  battery.     Should  you 


12 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


CABINET    BASE    MASSAGER. 


RUBBER   CUP    MASSAGER,    STORAGE  BATTERIES, 


RUBBER   CUP    MASSAGER,   CITY    CURRENT. 


THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL. 


75 


NATURAL   HAND   MASSAGER. 


be    located    in    a    city    where    electricity   or    city   water 
power  cannot  be  had  and  wish  to  use  the  vibratory,  the 


76  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

storage  battery  of  course  would  be  the  only  power  that 
would  be  obtainable.  With  this  instrument  no  elec- 
tricity is  applied  to  the  subject,  as  is  quite  frequently 
believed  and  it  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  benefits  of 
this  method  of  massaging,  by  which  the  length  of  time 
required  for  the  operation  is  shortened. 

Among  the  different  grades  of  instruments,  are  those 
that  stand  on  the  roller  cabinet,  so  that  they  may  be 
placed  convenient  to  the  different  chairs  of  the  shop 
without  difficulty,  some  are  built  to  hang  from  a  spring 
in  an  iron  stand,  while  others  stand  on  a  wooden 
cabinet. 

There  are  others  more  simply  constructed  which  in 
themselves  are  a  small  motor  attached  to  either  the 
city  wire  or  storage  battery  and  operate  a  small  ham- 
mer-like rubber  cup,  from  within  the  instrument  held 
in  the  hand. 

Only  one  style  of  manufacture  offers  the  machine 
that  gives  the  natural  hand  massage. 

This  is  recommended  very  highly  by  numerous  physi- 
cians on  account  of  the  benefits  that  can  be  derived 
from  the  hand  in  place  of  the  mechanical  rubber  cup. 
This  instrument  has  an  arm  running  from  the  motor 
to  the  hand,  giving  it  the  rapid  movement  and  allowing 
some  skill  to  be  displayed  in  manipulation  of  the  differ- 
ent movements. 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


77 


ELECTRIC  MASSAGE. 

The  electric  apparatus  that  operates  entirely  on  an- 
other principle  supplies  electricity  direct  to  the  patient, 
by  means  of  the  roller,  sponge  disc  or  through  the 
operator  and  gives  what  is  known  as  the  Electric  Mas- 
sage. The  Faradic  current  is  the  only  one  suitable  for 
this  style  of  massage  and  it  is  essential  that  a  battery 
of  light  voltage  is  used  to  avoid  a  severe  shock  at  any 
time.  Among  the  many  manufactured  is  one  that  in- 
cludes the  dry  cells  with  conducting  cords,  sponge  disc, 


N24.4 

,''ARAb/G  BATTERY 


M;^ 


ELECTRIC    BATTERIES    AND    ACCESSORIES. 


78  THE   BARBERS'   MANUAL. 

rollers,  brushes  and  other  small  accessories.  It  is  the 
only  one  intended  exclusively  for  the  barber  and  mas- 
suer's  use. 

Quite  frequently  results  can  be  obtained  by  the  elec- 
tric massage  than  cannot  be  reached  by  other  means 
and  it  is  well  to  have  this  battery  as  part  of  your  equip- 
ments whether  employed  as  a  journeyman  or  conduct- 
ing your  own  business.  It  is  portable  and  can  be 
operated  without  danger  of  injurious  effects.  By  many, 
electricity  is  considered  one  of  the  best  means  of 
destroying  germs  and  contagious  diseases. 

For  finger  manipulation  alone,  without  the  use  of 
mechanical  devices,  it  is  only  necessary  to  be  provided 
with  hot  water,  towels  and  creams  for  that  purpose. 
Many  prefer  this  method  of  massaging,  although  it 
usually  requires  a  little  longer  time  to  give  it.  The 
nature  of  the  creams  and  skin  foods  used  for  this  proc- 
ess is  entirely  different  from  that  used  with  mechanical 
devices,  although  each  are  for  the  purpose  of  cleansing 
the  skin  and  building  up  the  tissue  and  is  an  important 
factor  in  this  work.  A  number  of  these  devices  are 
suitable  for  the  use  of  massaging  the  scalp  as  well  as 
the  face.  They  should  be  kept  well  oiled,  handled  care- 
fully and  cups  sterilized  in  a  lo  per  cent  solution  of 
carbolic  acid  after  each  treatment. 

One  specialist  has  the   following  to  say  about  Vibra- 


THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL.  .  79 

tory  Massage :  The  general  public  is  now  so  thoroughly 
conversant  with  the  great  benefits  of  manual  massage 
or  system  of  manipulation  and  kneading  for  relief  of 
all  ailments,  that  we  will  not  devote  any  space  to  this 
subject,  but  mechanical  massage  which  is  fast  taking 
the  place  of  hand  manipulation  is  not  so  well  known. 
Whenever  a  treatment  is  give'n,  however,  there  is  such 
an  invigorating  and  agreeable  effect  produced,  that 
your  patron  not  only  discards  the  old  methods,  but 
becomes  a  more  frequent  user  of  the  new.  Never  in 
the  history  of  any  treatment  has  there  been  anything 
that  has  sprung  into  popularity  in  so  short  a  time  as 
Vibratory  Message,  more  commonly  known  as  Mechan- 
ical Massage. 

No  barber  shop,  no  masseur's  or  Dermatologist's  par- 
lor or  treating  room  is  complete  without  an  outfit. 

FACIAL  MASSAGE. 

Poor  circulation  of  the  blood  is  the  direct  cause  of 
many  affections  of  the  skin  and  scalp  as  well  as  dis- 
orders of  the  body.  When  the  minute  blood  vessels 
and  pores  of  the  face  fail  to  perform  their  respective 
duties  and  impurities  are  not  properly  eliminated,  black 
heads,  pimples,  wrinkles,  etc.,  appear. 

A  treatment  gives  activity  to  the  blood  vessels  which 


80  THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL. 

carry  off  the  impurities  and  with  the  movement  of  the 
massager  the  pores  are  opened  and  thoroughly  cleansed, 
leaving  the  skin  soft  and  smooth. 

These  treatments  are  becoming  so  popular  that  not 
only  the  men,  but  many  ladies  are  taking  them.  As 
any  hygienist  will  appreciate,  that  this  form  of  treat- 
ment will  do  more  in  securing  a  beautiful  complexion 
and  a  lasting  one,  than  all  the  cosmetics  and  alleged 
beautifiers  in  the  world. 

SCALP  TREATMENT. 

There  is  no  way  possible  of  treating  the  scalp  as  can 
be  done  by  massage.  As  in  the  case  of  the  face,  it 
produces  a  good  circulation  of  the  blood  which  gives 
new  life  and  strength  to  the  hair  and  is  a  cure  for  all 
scalp  diseases. 

This  treatment  is  extremely  refreshing  and  is  felt  for 
hours  afterwards.  It  is  a  popular  treatment  for  the 
quick  cure  of  headache,  neuralgia,  muscular  twitching, 
insomnia,  etc. 

In  giving  a  facial  or  head  treatment,  always  finish  at 
the  lower  part  of  the  neck,  which  draws  the  blood  from 
the  brain,  relieving  congestion  where  it  exists,  and  this 
will  give  the  best  possible  result. 

BASED  UPON  NATURAL  LAWS. 

Hygeia-Vibration   is  no  longer  considered  a   fad,  but 


THE   BARBERS'   MANUAL.  81 

a  natural  and  scientific  treatment,  which  has  come  to 
stay.  It  is  fast  superseding  the  drugging  and  other 
harmful  methods. 

Aside  from  the  benefits  already  referred  to  in  the 
treatment  of  face  and  scalp,  the  combined  vibrating  and 
kneading  movements  of  a  massager  produce  wonderful 
results  as  an  exerciser  of  the  muscles  and  is  a  power- 
ful influence  upon  the  circulation  and  nerve  fluids  in 
all  ailments  and  weaknesses.  It  produces  a  decided 
"warming"  effect.  Specialists,  in  conducting  experi- 
ments in  vibratory  treatment,  have  noticed  the  marked 
increase  in  temperature  of  the  part  subjected  to  the 
massage,  the  amount  increased  depending  upon  the 
length  of  time  the  application  is  made  and  the  degree 
below  normal  temperature  at  the  start.  The  treatment, 
in  fact,  helps  not  only  in  local  conditions,  but  fills  the 
patient  from  head  to  foot  with  new  vigor  and  vitality, 
building  up  the  health  generally  a?  nothing  else  can. 
MUSCLES  OF  THE  FACE. 

In  order  that  you  will  better  understand  the  scien- 
tific manipulations  of  the  muscles  as  well  as  the  outer 
conditions  of  the  skin,  we  present  here  the  illustrations 
defining  each  and  every  muscle,  and  in  the  following 
pages  describe  how  they  are  to  be  manipulated  to  bring 
about  the  best  results.  For  this  illustration  and  descrip- 
tion we  are  indebted  to  Dr.  J.  E.  MacGregor. 


DIAGRAM   OF   MUSCI. 


THE  BARBERS'  MANUAL.  83 

Frontal  Bone. 

Parietal. 

Occiptal. 

Squamous  portion  of  Temporal. 

Pronto-parietal    (Coronal)    and  Occipito-pareital 

(Lamboid)   sutures. 
Malar. 

External  Auditory  Meatus. 
Orbicularis   Palpebrarum  Muscle. 
Zygomatici  Major  and  Minor. 
Masseter  Muscle. 
Orbicularis  Oris. 
Levator-Menti. 
Sterno-mastoid. 
Levator  Auguli  Scapulae. 
Omo-Hyoid-anterior  part. 
Internal  Jugular  vein. 
Facial  Vein. 
Temporal  Vein. 
Common  Cortoid  Artery. 
Facial  Artery. 
Superficial  Cervical  nerves. 
Facial  Nerve. 
Supra-maxillary  division. 
Trachea. 
Occipito  Frontalis. 


84 


THE   BARBERS'   MANUAL. 


DESCRIPTION  AND  ACTION  OF  FACIAL  MUS- 
CLES. 

(Dps 
Jh    r]   ™   «3 


U   -M       • 

Jh    -<-'     .* 

->  •'^     ti 

"H      J^ 

<U          OJ 

<U         a; 

>  tfl  p, 
°   cfl   3 

— '    <u 

•— <    (D 

^  ^  -^ 

Vh  -^-' 

tfl      ~.^ 

tfl    ...s 

■3    ^    "J 

k1^ 

'd'O^ 

il  ^ 

(fl 

M    C    g 

0^ 
^3  'd 

>> 

Sh 

0 

t«-G  x: 
•'^  he  p 

Bends 
ward 
one  si 

6 

h:i5  a 

k   6 

^  G 
>>  o 


f      ■        tH 

<+-!        1                1 

0  <u 

0      «              1 

part 
3r  ma 
bone 

'd  t::^ 

.^  0 

•^  >. 

0         ,. 
G   ^  t^ 
0   ^  > 
2  ?^,  rt 

wer 
nfer 
liar 

0     «->''-5 

0  •'-'•'-'  1 

0 

>A         1 

^  o 
tn 
'u  (U 

rt  ^    . 

G  hiot3 
5«o 


.s  ^  ^ 

^  0 

1 

0 
U 

bcG  a; 

0 

^3  to 

Pi    ^'i^ 

(u  a> 

Q^ 

C  -G   tfl 

Mh  'T' 

cog 

"^        0 

3 
'0  tfl 

+J  M-l     0 

0   rt    G 

t«    (U 

M    0    5- 

rt  0 

W 

h 

^ 

CO 
^  'o 

-o  % 

>    S 
u 

G  ^'■' 

O   G 


0)  o 
GO 


c  ^ 

art 


'O 

G 
nJ 

rt 

G  "^ 

[fl 

tC    ;>, 

tfl 

"^-i    J- 

0 

0    rt 

+->  •-' 

1-H 

S-  T^ 

nJ    . 

nj   (^ 

5-1  rt 

art 

^0 

a;   G 

6  rt 

ai- 

0)  MH 

ao 

H 

P 

o 

G 

a 


^    CO       • 

X3   <U   to 

cfi  ^    C 


CO-- 

p  rt 

£0,^ 

G 


O  rt 

.i7o 
o  ■♦-• 
O 


. 

oj 

tH 

p 

(U 

a 

•4-> 
(A 

s 

(0 

rt 

H 

^ 

rt 

o  tfl 
hioG 

S3 


CO      1, 

CO 

1      1 

•r-i   nj 
rt   n 

^1 

nj 

■J  tfl 

rbicul 
palpe 
rum. 

G     . 

0  «    . 

0  to 

tern 
do- 
toid 

10 

0 

CO            1 

THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  85 

FINGER  MANIPULATION. 

In  order  to  give  a  satisfactory  massage,  it  is  first 
necessary  that  your  customer  has  a  smooth  shave  to 
manipulate  successfully.  If  you  have  just  given  the 
shave,  keep  your  customer  in  the  same  position  for 
the  massage  and  continue  with  it  before  drying  the 
face.  With  an  ordinary  shave,  one  or  two  hot  towels 
is  sufficient,  but  to  prepare  for  the  massage  use  three 
or  four.  If  your  customer  comes  to  you  with  a  smooth 
shave,  place  him  in  the  chair,  cover  him  with  a  hair 
cloth,  arrange  the  breast  towel  the  same  as  for  giving 
a  shave  and  have  the  customer  prepared  for  the  hot 
towel  process.  It  is  essential  that  you  use  clean  water. 
If  you  are  so  arranged  that  you  draw  the  hot  water 
from  a  tank  supplied  by  the  building  in  which  you  may 
be  located,  it  is  presumed  that  the  water  is  clean  as 
it  is  usually  boiled  before  reaching  the  faucet.  If  you 
have  an  apparatus  such  as  is  used  in  numerous  shops, 
that  is  in  itself  an  instantaneous  heater  where  the 
water  is  drawn  from  the  city  pipes  this  will  be  suit- 
able, but  if  you  have  a  small  tank  to  be  filled  with  well 
water  or  from  city  pipes,  you  must  be  particularly 
cautious  that  the  tank  or  receptable  holding  the  water 
is  kept  free  from  all  impurities. 

It  is  very  essential  that  the  towels   used   are  as  hot 


86 


THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL. 


as  can .  be  handled  in  order  to  bring  about  the  best 
results.  If  your  washstand  is  some  distance  away  from 
your  chair,  it  is  advisable  to  keep  your  towels  folded 
in  such  a  manner  that  it  will  be  easily  unwrapped  when 
close  to  the  face  in  order  to  let  the  steam  of  the  towel 
strike  the  face  before  applying  the  hot  towel. 


APPLYING    HOT   TOWEL. 

We  are  now  ready  to  place  the  towel  on  the  face, 
holding  it  at  either  end  with  the  two  hands  in  such 
a  manner  that  it  will  be  drawn  perfectly  tight.  Let 
the  center  of  the  towel  strike  the  chin  and  bring  it  up 
over  all  parts  of  the  face  to  be  massaged,  covering 
the  eyes  and  forehead,  leaving  only  the  end  of  the  nose 
uncovered.     A  small  Turkish  towel  is  most  suitable  for 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  87 

this  use.  Bringing  one  end  of  the  towel  np  over  the 
other  at  the  forehead  and  allow  it  to  remain  on  the 
face  while  saturating  another  towel.  The  second  towel 
may  be  laid  on  top  of  this  one  in  the  same  manner  or 
after  the  first  towel  has  rested  on.  the  face  a  half  a 
minute.  It  may  be  taken  off  and  replaced  with  the 
second  towel.  It  may  be  well  that  you  use  a  third 
towel  well  down  on  the  neck,  being  careful  that  you 
do  not  get  the  collar  or  shirt  band  wet.  Repeat  this 
as  often  as  it  seems  necessary  to  thoroughly  steam  and 
redden  the  face,  thus  bringing  blood  to  the  surface  and 
assists  the  manipulation. 

You  now  have  the  face  ready  for  the  rolling  cream, 
so  called  on  account  of  the  manner  in  which  it  rolls 
off  from  the  face  during  the  manipulation.  Without 
drying  on  face,  take  a  small  portion  of  the  cream  in 
the  palm  of  the  left  hand  and  with  the  ends  of  the 
fingers  of  the  right  hand,  put  a  small  amount  on  the 
face  at  a  time,  distributing  it  as  evenly  as  possible 
without  delaying  the  work  or  wasting  more  time  than 
is  necessary.  Time  must  be  saved  in  this  process  in 
order  to  start  the  manipulation  before  the  face  has 
time  to  thoroughly  dry.  Have  the  cream  evenly  dis- 
tributed over  all  parts  that  are  to  be  massaged,  giving 
it  a  thin  layer,  similar  to  a  coat  of  paint.  Frequently 
the  cream  becomes  dry  and  does  not  separate  readily; 


88  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

in  this  event,  it  can  be  softened  or  thinned  with  a  small 
amount  of  witch  hazel.  After  yon  have  your  cream 
spread,  rub  the  two  hands  together  with  a  small  amount 
of  cream  in  order  to  thoroughly  saturate  the  insides 
of  the  hands.  Begin  the  manipulation  as  shown  in 
figure. 


ROTARY    CHEEK    MOVEMENT. 


Take  your  position  back  of  the  customer  in  such  a 
manner  that  you  have  free  action  of  both  arms.  Place 
the  hands  on  the  cheeks  and  rub  in  a  rotary  movement, 
beginning    at    the    jaw    bone    and    work    up    over    the 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

cheeks  toward  the  eyes  and  ears.  Some  practice  will 
be  required  to  learn  to  manipulate  with  both  hands 
alike,  using  only  the  balls  of  the  fingers  and  give  what 
IS  known  as  the  rotary  movement.  Repeat  the  manipu- 
lation from  five  to  ten  times,  varying  it  in  such  a  way 
that  you  will  cover  all  parts  of  the  side  of  the  face  to 
the  temple. 

It  will  require  some  experience  to  know  just  how 
many  movements  to  make  in  order  to  get  all  over  the 
face  before  it  starts  to  dry.  On  a  fleshy  person  whose 
face  is  naturally  warm,  the  cream  drys  much  faster  than 
on  a  thin  bloodless  face.  Going  to  the  second  move- 
ment, place  the  ends  of  the  fingers  together  under  the 


STRAIGHT    NASAL    MOVEMENT. 


90 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


chin  and  with  the  two  thumbs  on  each  side  of  the  nose 
as  shown  in  illustration. 

Manipulate  with  the  thumbs  in  a  straight  up  and 
down  movement  on  both  sides  of  the  nose,  working 
down  to  the  part  of  the  cheek  that  has  been  manipu- 
lated in  the  first  movement.  Repeat  this  manipulation 
about  the  same  number  of  times  as  the  former.  It  is 
necessary  to  place  the  fingers  under  the  chin  in  order 
to  steady  the  hand  while  giving  the  thumbs  the  move- 
ment. Continue  down  the  face  to  the  upper  lip  with 
each  thumb  and  continue  down  over  the  chin,  still 
keeping  the  end  of  the  fingers  in  the  same  position 
completing,  this  movement. 


ROTARY    FRONTALIS. 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


91 


Now  place  the  ends  of  the  fingers  on  the  cheeks  and 
manipulate  with  the  thumbs  over  the  forehead  in  a 
rotary  movement  as  described  in  Rotary  Frontalis. 
This  is  to  develop  the  Occipito  Frontalis  muscle  to 
eradicate  the  lines  that  form  at  the  forehead. 

Now  we  are  ready  for  the  kneading  and  rolling  proc- 
ess. Take  your  position  at  the  side  of  the  chair, 
(starting  on  the  right  side)  by  picking  up  a  roll  of  the 


KNEADING    AND    ROLLING. 


skin   at   the   lower  part   of  the   ear  and    kneading   and 
rolling  in  the  direction  as  shown  in  illustration, 
varying  the  direction  until  you  have  covered  the  right 


92 


THE    BARBERS"    MANUAL. 


side  of  the  face,  working  from  the  ear  toward  tlie  chin, 
along  the  jaw  bone,  as  well  as  toward  the  nose  and  up 
toward  the  eyes.  This  is  to  strengthen  the  two  mus- 
cles No.  9  Zygomatic!  Major  and  Minor  and  No.  lO 
The  Masseter  as  shown  in  the  diagram. 

If  the  massage  is  given  for  the  purpose  of  reducing 
the  flesh,  it  should  be  more  vigorous  as  this  will  cause 
the  muscles  to  develop,  taking  the  place  of  areolar 
tissue,  (fat)  which  is  decreased,  thus  hardening  the 
flabby  loose  skin.     At  about  this  point  in  the  operation 


STRAIGHT   FRONTALIS. 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL,  93 

the  cream  should  begin  to  come  off  the  skin  in  rolls. 
Care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  not  allowed  to  work 
underneath  the  collar.  Continue  to  manipulate  by 
kneading  on  both  sides  as  long  as  the  cream  rolls  and 
continue  over  the  nose  and  forehead  and  between  the 
eyes.  By  stretching  the  skin,  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers  of  the  left  hand,  rub  up  and  down  over  the 
Occipito  Frontalis  with  the  second  finger  of  the  right 
hand  as  described  in  illustration,  Straight  Frontal. 

Now  stretch  the  skin  tight  between  the  eyebrows 
with  finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand  and  rub  lightly 
with  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  across  the 
lines  that  form  at  this  point.  Care  must  be  taken  not 
to  massage  too  heavy  to  over-develop  these  muscles, 
thus  giving  the  face  a  stern  appearance'.  Now  place 
the  thumb  and  finger  of  the  left  hand  under  the  eye 
at  the  bridge  of  the  nose  and  at  the  outer  corner^ 
stretching  the  skin  lightly  underneath  the  eye.  The 
massage  is  giy,ep  with  the  second  finger  of  the  right 
hand.  Rub  from  the  inner  corner  out  in  a  half  circular 
movement  a?  shovyn  in  figure,  Circular  Movement. 

Great  care  i?3ust  be  exercised  in  not  massaging  too 
heavy  at  this  ^oint  as  it  is  easy  to  discolor  the  eye, 
giving  it  the  ap|^earane,e  of  a  bruise.  This  should  ben,e- 
.fit  the  dsifk  circles  a;t^d  ;Cares\vOrn  appearance,  but  ^ust 


94  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

not  be  overdone.  This  operates  on  the  Orbicularis 
Palpebrarum.  Now  place  the  finger  of  the  left  hand 
above  and  below  the  outer  corner  of  the  eye  and  mas- 
sage lightly  across  the  lines  commonly  known  as  crow's 
feet  that   form  at  this  point.     Now  take  your  position 


CIRCULAR  ORBICULAR    MOVEMENT. 


behind  the  customer  and  rub  over  the  entire  face  lightly 
to  remove  all  particles  of  cream  that  may  have  been 
left  on  the  face  in  rolls. 

In    case   your    subject    is    troubled    with   black    heads, 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  95 

the  cream  while  being  rolled  from  the  face  will  re- 
move some  of  the  small  ones,  but  in  the  event  of  larger 
ones  appearing,  it  will  be  necessary  to  use  the  Comedo 
Extractor. 

Now  apply  another  hot  towel  as  formerly  described, 
repeating  three  or  four  times,  allowing  the  fade  to 
steam  from  two  to  three  minutes.  Now  is  the  time 
to  use  the  Comedo  Extractor,  but  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  only  a  few  must  be  removed  in  immediate 
proximity  to  each  other.  You  may  take  a  small  por- 
tion of  one  side  of  the  face  and  then  a  small  portion 


COMEDO  EXTRACTOR. 


of  the  other  side,  but  in  severe  cases  it  may  require 
several  treatments  to  remove  them  all.  Draw  the  skin 
.tight  with  the  thumb  and  finger  of  the  left  hand  over 
the  black  heads  to  be  removed  and  place  the  hole  of 
the  Comedo  Extractor  over  the  black  heads.  If  they 
are   too  obstinate,    it   is   not  policy  to   irritate   the   face 


96  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

by  too  severe  pressure,  but  wait  for  two  or  three  treat- 
ments, which  will  eventually  remove  them. 

In  case  your  subject  is  troubled  with  pimples,  you 
should  be  careful  to  ascertain  what  is  their  cause.  In 
case  of  systemic  diseases,  syphlitic  diseases  and  gastro 
intestinal,  it  is  not  policy  to  try  to  treat  by  this  process, 
although  they  may  be  benefitted  by  it.  The  pimples 
that  can  be  treated  most  successfully  is  one  that  will 
be  found  with  a  small  black  head  in  the  center  and 
contains  pus,  which  is  caused  by  the  decomposition  of 
the  black  heads.  If  the  contents  can  be  removecf 
easily,  do  so  by  pinching  it  lightly  between  the  two 
thumbs,  being  careful  not  to  allow  the  nails  to  come 
in  contact  with  the  open  pimple.  If  it  is  not  easily 
removed,  let  it  have  another  treatment.  If  removed, 
apply  Peroxide  of  Hydrogen  with  a  small  piece  of 
cotton,  but  do  not  allow  the  cotton  to  remain  on  any 
length  of  time.  If  left  too  long,  peroxide  will  destroy 
the  tissue  and  leave  a  small  scar.  This  is  used  as  an 
antiseptic. 

In  all  methods  of  massaging,  whether  or  not  pimples 
or  black  heads  appear,  finish  by  anointing  the  face  with 
cold  cream  or  skin  food.  After  thoroughly  rubbing  it 
into  the  skin,  remove  all  that  is  possible  to  wipe  ofif 
with  a  clean,  soft  towel.  In  most  instances  it  wili 
be  desired  by  your  patient  that  you   apply  another  hot 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  97 

towel  and  immediately  after  a  cold  one  to  close  the 
pores  and  harden  the  flesh.  In  first-class  establish- 
ments, a  toilet  water  of  some  description  is  used,  but 
the  massage  may  be  given  without.  Thoroughly  wipe 
the  face  and  apply  a  good  wholesome  powder  as  is 
described  in  shaving. 

It  is  advisable  that  a  sifter  top  can  is  used  in  prefer- 
ance  to  the  lump  magnesia  or  puff  as  there  is  not  the 
possibility  of  diseases  being  conveyed  from  one  face  to 
another. 

VIBRATORY. 

The  Vibratory  Massage  may  be  given  in  addition  to 
the  finger  manipulation  or  in  connection  with  the  elec- 
tric massage  if  desired,  but  ordinarily  only  one  style 
is  required  at  a  time,  although  many  customers  vary 
the  treatments,  having  first  one  and  then  the  other. 
Where  this  method  is  desired  without  either  of  the 
others,  prepare  your  customers  by  applying  the  hot 
towels  as  described  in  the  manner  of  finger  manipu- 
llatu-ottii  and  after  the  face  is  thoroughly  steamed,  apply 
a  cream  which  is  a  sk'm  food,  not  the  rolling  cream  as 
described  with  the  fofmer  movements. 

This  cream  both  cleanses  and  builds  up  tissues  and 
is  driven  into  the  face  by  the  rapid  vibrating  movement 


98  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

of  the  instrument.  After  spreading  the  cream,  apply 
one  hot  towel  in  order  to  soften  the  cream,  making  it 
easier  to  drive  into  the  pores  of  the  skin.  As  the  face 
cannot  be  thoroughly  cleaned  by  the  use  of  hot  towels, 
wipe  the  cream  from  the  face  with  a  clean,  dry  towel 
and  it  will  be  seen  that  much  dirt  will  be  removed 
even  after  the   face  has  been  well  washed. 

You  may  now  apply  cream  again  and  you  have  the 
customer  ready  for  the  instrument.  If  you  are  using 
the  style  of  machine  to  which  the  hand  is  attached  in 
place  of  the  rubber  cups,  fasten  the  right  hand  on 
securely  by  running  the  entire  hand  through  the  first 
strap  and  the  second  and  third  finger  through  the 
second  strap.  Buckle  it  tightly,  so  there  will  be  no 
lost  motion  between  the  hand  and  the  instrument. 
Place  the  machine  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  chair 
from  which  you  are  working,  so  that  arm  of  instru- 
ment will  be  at  right  angles  with  the  hand,  as  shown 
in  illustration.  Vibratory  Hand  Massage. 

Start  the  machine  in  motion  and  begin  the  massage 
on  the  forehead.  Cross  the  lines,  working  from  one 
side  of  the  forehead  to  the  other.  Place  the  fingers 
on  the  face  lightly,  then  pass  over  the  same  surface, 
allowing  the  ends  of  the  fingers  to  tap  the  face  with 
the  rapid  movement  caused  by  the  machine.  Work 
dowai  over  the  cheeks  in  a   rotary  movement  until  the 


THE   BARBERS'   MANUAL. 


VIBRATORY   HAND    MASSAGE. 


100  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

entire  side  of  the  face  is  massaged.  Work  up  over  the 
nose  and  very  lightly  underneath  the  eyes,  gradnall)' 
working  across  the  chin  to  the  other  side  of  the  face, 
and  massage  both  sides  alike. 

If  you  have  a  revolving  chair  so  that  it  can  be 
adjusted,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  stop  your  machine 
to  operate  on  both  sides  of  the  face,  but  in  case  you 
have  an  ordinary  reclining  chair  which  does  not  re- 
volve, it  will  be  necessary  to  massage  one  side,  then 
place  the  machine  on  the  other  side  of  the  chair  and 
complete  your  work. 

The  Vibratory  Massage  should  not  be  overdone.  In 
no  instance  should  it  be  applied  more  than  fifteen 
minutes  and  usually  not  more  than  ten.  This  method 
of  massaging  affords  the  customer  a  very  pleasant 
sensation,  one  that  is  difficult  to  describe,  but  when 
once  given  will  be  much  sought  after.  If  the  work 
has  been  properly  done,  the  cream  will  have  been 
absorbed  by  the  face  an-d  it  will  be  left  with  a  healthy 
glow.  Judgmepit  must  be  dis.pl;ayed  in  niiassagjng  the 
.different  faces.  If  you  have  a  skin  that  is  very  tender 
and  .easily  irritated,  yo,u  must  be  particularly  cautious 
to  make  your  stroke  light.  If  you  have  a  face  that  is 
thin  with  hollow  cheeks  and  needs  building  up,  work 
jn  as  much  cream  as  is  possible  by  applying  if  a  secon<d 
0r  third  time  and  allow  your  sitroke  to  be  firm,  bijil 
ligM. 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  101 

Some  study  of  the  diagram  will  be  necessary  in  order 
to  more  intelligently  understand  what  muscles  to 
develop.  If  lines  form  under  the  ears,  you  will  see  the 
necessity  of  strengthening  the  muscles  that  hold  that 
part  of  the  flesh  in  place  and  you  should  then  work 
on  the  back  portion  of  the  Masseter  muscle. 

If  the  massage  is  given  to  reduce  the  flesh,  such  as 
the  double  chin,  the  stroke  should  be  more  vigorous, 
always  working  from  the  lower  part  of  the  face  up, 
in  order  to  bring  back  to  the  natural  condition  the 
loose  flabby  skin. 

ELECTRIC. 

For  this  treatment,  prepare  your  customer  as  before 
with  the  hot  towels  and  cream,  thoroughly  cleansing 
the  face  before  starting  the  operation.  The  electric 
massage  may  be  given  by  use  of  the  roller  and  sponge 
disc,  which  applies  the  electricity  direct  to  the  cus- 
tomer, or  through  the  operator  by  attaching  the  wrist 
band  to  the  massuer.  If  the  sponge  discs  are  preferred, 
prepare  your  battery  by  attaching  the  cord  to  the  post 
marked  "N"  and  the  other  end  to  the  metal  handle 
which  is  placed  in  the  customer's  hand.  To  the  post 
marked  "P"  attach  the  other  cord  and  to  the  other 
end  of  the  sponge  disc,  which  must  be  thoroughly  wet. 
This  is  very  essential  as  there  would  be  no  benefit  of 
the  electric  massage  with  a  dry  sponge. 


102  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL 

Place  your  battery  on  the  work  stand  in  such  a 
manner  that  you  will  have  free  use  of  the  cord  to 
which  the  sponge  disc  is  attached.  Take  your  position 
at  the  side  of  the  chair  and  proceed  the  same  as  with 
the  vibratory.  This  method  is  usually  given  for  the 
purpose  of  plumping  the  cheeks  after  the  finger  manipu- 
lation. After  having  worked  with  .the  disc  in  the 
rotary  movement  on  the  cheeks,  detach  it  and  put  in 
its  place  the  roller.  Roll  it  lightly  over  the  forehead, 
up  and  down  across  the  wrinkles  and  over  the  ex- 
pression lines  that  form  at  the  corners  of  the  eye. 
However,  the  most  popular  electric  massage  is  given 
by  attaching  the  wrist  band  with  the  sponge  electrode, 
thoroughly  wet,  and  fastened  to  the  inside  of  the  wrist 
and  proceed  with  the  work  the  same  as  described  in 
the  finger  manipulation.  This  gives  a  soothing  and 
pleasant  sensation,  destroys  germs  of  disease  with 
which  it  comes  in  contact  and  is  considered  by  many 
the  most  healthful  and  pleasant  massage  given.  In 
every  case,  where  the  electric  massage  is  required,  it 
is  necessary  that  the  customer  holds  the  metal  handle. 
Without  this  there  would  be  no  current  and  no  benefits 
from  the  electricity. 

Many  customers  are  able  to  stand  a  great  deal  more 
electricity   than   others  and  you   can   guage   the  amount 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL.  103 

to  be  given  by  adjusting  the  shield  at  the  right  of  the 
battery  made  for  this  purpose. 

If  the  instrument  is  used  that  manipulates  the  rubber 
cup,  proceed  on  the  same  Hues  as  laid  down  for  the 
hand  massage,  allowing  the  instrument  to  tap  the  face 
lightly  or  heavier  as  the  case  may  require.  Experience 
and  practice  will  do  much  to  teach  you  the  harm  or 
benefit  that  results  from  this  work.  Where  you  find 
that  certain  muscles  are  being  over-developed,  giving 
the  face  a  coarser  appearance,  work  on  lines  that  will 
build  up  f^esh   instead  of  muscles. 

Many  kinds  of  creams  are  used  for  this  purpose, 
but  the  formula  given  on  the  following  pages  are  the 
best  that  we  have  been  able  to  ascertain  and  can  be 
manufactured  in  your  own  shop  with  little  difficulty, 
but  in  most  cases  they  can  be  secured  from  the  supply 
houses  at  little  additional  cost,  saving  the  trouble  of 
preparing  them.  The  rolling  cream  as  described  for 
the  finger  manipulation  is  not  suitable  for  the  vibra- 
tory use  and  is  not  intended  to  build  up  tissue.  It  is 
a  substance  made  from  milk  chemically  prepared  and 
one  that  requires  a  special  machine  to  grind  and  whip 
it  to  the  proper  consistency.  This  could  not  be  manu- 
factured successfully  at  home. 

SCALP  MASSAGE. 

One  essential   requirement  to  a  good  head  of  hair  is 


104 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


VIBKATORY    CUP    MASSAGE, 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 


105 


VIBRATORY    SCALP    MASSAGE 


good  circulation.     This  can  be  brought  about  by  finger 
manipulation,    vibratory   massage   or    electricity^   and    if 


106  THE   BARBERS'   MANUAL. 

you  educate  your  customers  to  the  benefits  of  this  work, 
you  will  reap  a  splendid  revenue. 

In  giving  the  finger  manipulation  as  well  as  the  other 
treatments  it  is  best  that  you  use  a  good  tonic.  Place 
your  customer  in  a  chair  in  an  upright  position,  the 
same  as  for  haircutting.  Spread  the  hair  cloth  and 
towels  in  the  same  manner  as  for  a  shampoo,  apply 
the  tonic  the  same  as  wetting  the  hair  preparatory  for 
combing  and  start  your  manipulation  by  taking  the 
position  back  of  the  customer,  placing  either  hand  at 
the  sides  of  the  head  and  work  upward  in  quick, 
rotary  movements,  using  the  balls  of  the  fingers  and 
thumb  in  such  a  manner  that  it  will  loosen  the  scalp 
but  will  not  pull  the  hair.  Proceed  clear  around  the 
head,  changing-  your  position  as  it  is  necessary  to  get 
at  the  work.  Now  place  the  fingers  on  top  of  the  head 
to  steady  the  hands,  and  with  the  balls  of  the  thumbs 
work  the  scalp  in  a  rotary  movement,  going  all  over 
the  head  from  -the  base  of  the  brain  up.  About  from 
five  to  ten  minutes  should  be  consumed  in  manipu- 
lation. 

In  using  the  Vibratory,  you  may  apply  the  tonic  or 
not,  as  your  customer  desires.  If  you  are  using  the 
machine  to  which  the  hand  is  attached,  start  at  the 
right  side  of  the  head,  with  the  machine  in  motion, 
using  the  left  hand  to  steady  the  head  and  work  from 


THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL.  107 

the  bottom  of  the  scalp  up,  continuing  clear  around. 
Always  finish  the  work  by  a  light  massage  at  the  base 
of  the  brain  to  draw  the  blood  to  that  part,  thus  avoid- 
ing headache  that  may  follow. 

If  the  machine  is  used  that  operates  the  rubber  cup, 
follow  the  same  principles  and  use  the  same  precaution 
not  to  overdo  the  work.  A  different  attachment  is 
furnished  with  each  machine  for  this  purpose. 

If  the  electric  scalp  massage  is  required,  the  only 
ones  that  can  be  given  successfully  is  through  the 
operator  by  use  of  the  wrist  band  or  the  metal  brush 
which  is  furnished  with  each  battery.  This  must  be 
used  gently,  but  by  it  the  electricity  i?  applied  to  the 
roots  of  the  hair,  creating  a  better  circulation  than  can 
be  had  in  any  other  way.  The  brush,  of  course,  must 
be  attached  the  same  as  the  roller  or  sponge  disc  and 
the  customer  must  hold  the  metal  handle  adjusted  to 
one  cord  from  the  instrument. 

HEADACHE    AND    NEURALGIA    MASSAGE. 

A  very  beneficial  article  for  the  Masseur,  although 
partly  varying  from  our  instructions,  is  the  following 
from  Margaret  Palmer's  "Lessons  on  Massage."  The 
treatment  is  intended  for  headache,  neuralgia  and  like 
ailments  and  may  be  used  very  successfully  in  the 
barber   shops,   if  handled  precautiously. 


108  THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

MASSAGE     OF     THE     HEAD. 

The  operator  stands  in  front,  but  rather  to  one  side 
of  the  patient,  who  is  seated. 

The  head  is  steadied  with  one  hand,  the  fingers  of 
the  other  hand  are  drawn  together,  and  firm  friction 
is  made  over  every  part  of  the  scalp.  The  pressure 
must  be  sufficient  to  move  the  scalp  thoroughly  on  the 
skull ;  this  is  sometimes  difficult,  owing  to  the  tight  and 
matted  condition  of  the  scalp ;  sometimes  the  scalp  on 
one  side  of  the  head  is  freely  movable,  and  on  the 
other  almost  fixed.  Friction  may  also  be  done  with 
the  whole  palmer  surface  of  both  hands  working 
together. 

Mjuch  relief  is  felt  from  these  movements  when  the 
head  is  tired  and  heavy.  They  are  said  also  to  pro- 
mote the  growth  of  the  hair. 

A  very  soothing  movement,  useful  in  nervous  head- 
aches and  to  promote  sleep,  is  done  with  the  cushions- 
of  all  fingers  of  both  hands,  working  slowly  in  circles 
from  occiput  to  forehead,  without  pressure ;  the  wrists 
are  raised.  Circular  movements  on  the  crown  of  the 
head  are  most  soothing,  as  also  are  circular  movements 
around  the  mastoid  process. 

If  used  to  induce  sleep,  the  patient  would  probably 
be  in  bed ;  in  this  case  the  movement  should  begin  at 
the  crown. 


THE  BARBERS'   MANUAL.  109 

THE  FACE. 

1.  The  thumb  is  placed  on  the  supra-orbital  notch 
on  the  affected  side,  and  the  supra-orbital  nerve  is 
pressed  against  the  bone ;  this  frequently  arrests  the 
pain.  The  course  of  the  nerve  upwards  may  be  fol- 
lowed with  friction  with  the  thumb. 

2.  Friction  with  the  thumb  from  middle  of  fore- 
head to  temple,  effleurage  from  temple  to  middle  line, 
following  the  course  of  veins.  The  tissue  should  be 
all   well  moved  about  and  then  stretched. 

When  the  pain  is  below  the  orbit,  friction  is  done 
from  the  angle  of  jaw  to  middle  of  the  mouth,  press- 
ing on  the  maxillary  bones. 

All  the  muscles  of  the  cheek  kneaded  with  the  thumb 
and  fingers,  to  be  followed  by  circular  effleurage  with 
palm  of  hand. 

THE  EYE. 

1.  The  cushion  of  the  thumb  is  placed  on  the  closed 
lid,  pointing  to  the  nose;  by  friction  the  lid  is  made 
to  work  over  the  eyeball. 

2.  Stroking  with  the  thumb  from  outer  edge  of 
orbit  to  nose  on  upper  and  lower  lid. 

3.  The  lid  picked  up  between  the  finger  and  thumb, 
and  moved  up  and  down. 


no  THE    BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

4.  Friction  on  supra  and  infra  orbital,  and  supra 
and  infra  trochlear  nerves,  relieves  pain  in  the  eye. 

5.  Gentle  pressure  from  outer  angle  of  eye,  inwards 
to  and  dovv^n  side  of  nose,  relieves  congestion  and 
swelling. 

FACIAL  PARALYSIS. 

1.  The  muscles  of  the  affected  side  of  the  face  are 
kneaded  with  thumb  and  finger. 

2.  Friction  of  forehead  and  side  of  head  and  corner 
of  mouth. 

3.  Circular  movements  around  mouth  and  eye. 

4.  Vibrations  with   tips  of  fingers. 

STIFF  JAW. 

1.  Friction  about  the  joint. 

2.  Petrissage  of  all  muscles  that  move  the  joint. 
Improvement  may  be  tested  from  time  to  time  by  in- 
sertion of  bits  of  wood  between  the  teeth.  A  Screw 
gag  is  sometimes  used. 

Any  of  the  instruments,  creams  or  tonics  can  be  had 
at  the  MOLER  BARBER  SUPPLY  HOUSE,  39  Peck 
Court,  Chicago,  111.  A  beautiful  catalogue  of  these 
goods   is   mailed   free   upon   application. 


THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL.  HI 

FORMULA  FOR  MOLER  M'ASSAGE  CREAM. 

Almond    Oil    4  ounces. 

Spermaceti     i  ounce. 

White    Wax    i  ounce. 

Benzoin    2  drops. 

Oil    of    Rose I  drop. 

Heat  almond  oil,  wax  and  spermaceti  in  double  boiler 
until  melted,  add  benzoin  and  oil  of  rose  while  cooling, 
and    stir   continually    until   thoroughly    whitened. 

FORMULA    FOR    MOLER    HAIR    TONIC. 

(Dry  scalp.) 

Bay   Rum    i  pint. 

Witch  Hazel    i  pint. 

Alcohol     I  pint. 

Glycerine     2  ozs. 

Tinct.   of  Cantharides 2  ozs. 

Ammonia     ^  oz. 

Mix  all  together  and  filter.  For  oily  scalp,  use  i 
oz.  of  glycerine  instead  of  two.  Peroxide  of  Hydrogen 
can  be  secured  at  any  drug  store. 


112  THE   BARBERS'    MANUAL. 

TOILET   WATER. 

Essence   violet 8  ozs. 

Deodorized  alcohol   7  pints 

Rose  water i  pint 

Mix  and  filter. 

PRICES. 

The  prices  in  most  establishments  for  this  work 
are  as  follows,  but  they  can  be  varied  according  to  the 
conditions,  the  class  of  people  to  be  operated  on,  etc. 

Facial  Massage    (finger  manipulation) 25c  to  50c 

Facial  Mjassage    (vibratory)    50c 

Facial    Massage    (electric) 50c 

Scalp   Massage    (all    styles) 25c 


BOOK  II. 

HAIRDRESSERS'  MANICURING,  FACIAL 

MASSAGE,  ELECTROLYSIS  AND 

CHIROPODY    MANUAL. 


Hairdressers^  ManuaL 


'\.-    '^*'4 


REQUIREMENTS   OF  HAIRDRESSER. 

In  considering  the  idea  of  becoming  a  hairdresser,  yoii 

will  naturally  question  yourself  regarding  requirements 

necessary  to  insure  success.     First,  the  most  important 

of  all,  is,  will  you  be  careful  and  painstaking;    are  you 


8  HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 

willing  to  wait  upon  others,  catering  to  whims  and 
dictations,  and  at  all  times  be  patient  and  pleasant. 

Aside  from  your  real  skill,  which  can  be  obtained 
only  by  continual  practice  and  careful  instructions, 
these    are   the   principal   requirements. 

You  must  dress  neatly,  and  if  in  the  employment 
of  others,  be  prompt  and  punctual.  This  is  not  work 
that  requires  any  special  adaptation,  but,  like  other 
work  that  is  mechanical,  it  requires  practice.  It  is  not 
true,  as  many  believe,  that  you  must  be  gifted  with  a 
particular  talent,  as  anyone  with  ordinary  ability  can 
succeed  if  they  have  the  patience  to  practice  and  if 
given  the  opportunity  such  as  our  Colleges  afford.  It 
has  been  demonstrated  that  the  most  awkward  begin- 
ners are  often  the  most  graceful  graduates.  Grace  and 
ease  of  motion  are  acquired  by  continued  use  of  cer- 
tain   muscles. 

Good  taste  has  much  to  do  with  proper  hairdress- 
ing  and  selecting  styles  suitable  to  all  conditions. 
While  it  is  true  that  some  are  more  gifted  than  others, 
at  the  beginning  of  the  term,  it  does  not  necessarily 
follow  that  they  will  be  the  most  satisfactory  grad- 
uates. 

The  students  who  devote  their  undivided  attention  to 
instructions,  and  examples  provided  for  them,  will  in- 
variably finish  with  the   highest  percentage.     Careless- 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  9 

ness  has  no  place  in  the  hairdressing  parlor,  and  one 
cannot  hope  to  succeed,  either  in  conducting  an  estab- 
lishment, or  in  the  employ  of  others,  without  solicitude 
for  the  patrons*  welfare. 

FURNITURE  AND  ARRANGEMENT  OF  ESTABLISH- 
MENTS. 

A  neatly  arranged  parlor  cannot  help  but  attract 
attention,  and  has  much  to  do  with  one's  success  in 
conducting  their  own  business.  It  does  not  always 
require  elaborate  furniture  or  expensive  outfits.  An 
establishment  for  two  or  three  operators  can  be  fur- 
nished for  $100,  but  to  keep  up  with  the  latest  styles 
in  furniture  and  apparatus,  it  will  require  consider- 
able more.  A  well  arranged  parlor  should  contain 
separate  booths  or  apartments  with  a  low  screen,  one 
that  will  not  affect  the  light,  and  in  each  apartment 
should  be  a  low  dressing  table  with  a  mirror  of  suf- 
ficient length  for  the  customer  to  see  herself  while 
seated  in  front  of  it,  and  for  the  hairdresser  to  see 
the  effect  of  her  work  as  she  progresses.  A  French 
dressing  stand  is  suitable  for  this  purpose,  or  a  mirror 
placed  on  a  shelf,  from  2i/^  to  3  feet  from  floor,  will 
suffice. 

Each  booth  should  be  provided  with  a  gas  iron 
heater,  attached  to  ordinary  gas  jet,  in  the  center  of  the 


10  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

room.  Or,  still  better,  a  gas  pipe  running  along  the 
wall  in  front  of  the  number  of  booths  required. 

Ordinary  comfortable  seating  chairs  with  low  back 
completes  the  furniture  of  each  booth. 

If  you  are  so  located  that  city  water  can  be  ob- 
tained, the  ordinary  wash  stand  is  sufficient  for  sham- 
poo purposes,  in  addition  to  an  instantaneous  water 
heater,  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  cut.     This  heater 


must  be  attached  to  the  water  and  to  the  gas,  and  can 
be  installed  by  any  plumber  or  gas  fitter,  although  few 
carry  an  instrument  of  this  kind  in  stock.  In  case  you 
do  not  want  to  go  to  this  expense  a  five-gallon  water 
can,  can  be  arranged  on  brackets  above  the  wash 
stand,  suitable   height  to  be   out  of  the  way.     Under- 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


11 


neath  the  can  should  be  a  gas,  gasoline,  or  kerosene, 
heater;  the  water  should  be  given  the  proper  tempera- 
ture before  using  the  spray.  With  this  style  of  water 
can  the  faucet  must  be  at  the  bottom  in  order  to  get 
the  pressure  of  water  to  operate  the  spray.  With  the 
instantaneous  heater  the  temperature  is  governed  by 
a  small  lever  that  regulates  the  flow  of  gas  and  watei 
at  the  same  time. 


HAIRDRYERS. 


12  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

A  hairdryer,  if  used,  should  be  located  convenient  to 
the  wash  stand,  so  that  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  take 
the  customer  any  great  distance  while  the  hair  is 
wet. 

There  are  many  styles  of  hairdryers.  One  of  the 
most  expensive  is  that  in  which  the  electric  fan  and 
heater  are  arranged  in  a  cabinet.  With  this  the  cur- 
rent created  by  the  fan  is  heated  by  the  flame  of  gas 
and  tempered  to  suit  the  customer.  Another  style  is 
the  one  in  which  the  gas  heater  is  inclosed  in  a  sheet 
iron  oven  or  tube  placed  in  front  of  an  electric  fan 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  blow  the  hot  air  through  the 
hair.  Another  style  is  the  heater  using  gas  only 
without  the  electric  fan,  but  this  is  not  considered  as 
satisfactory,  from  the  fact  that  hair  should  always 
be  fanned  or  rubbed  while  being  dried. 

If  hairwork  is  part  of  the  establishment,  it  is  best 
to  have  it  arranged  in  a  back  room  if  good  light  can 
be  had;  or  in  some  apartment  separate  from  the  hair- 
dressing  proper.  The  instruments  for  the  work  are  de- 
scribed on  the  following  page. 

In  manicuring — and  it  should  be  a  part  of  your 
work — a  small  table,  similar  to  a  sewing  table,  or  one 
made  especially  for  the  purpose,  can  be  arranged  at  one 
side  of  the  room  in  such  a  manner  that  light  will  come 
from  over  the  operator's  shoulder. 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


13 


There  are  regular  manicuring  tables  made  with  glass 
top  and  ^vith  drawers  at  the  side  for  cream,  powder  and 


14 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 


all  supplies  necessary  for  the  work.  These  are  more 
sanitary,  as  the  tops  can  be  kept  perfectly  clean,  and 
the  articles  used  closed  up  in  the  drawers,  free  from 
the  dust  of  the  room. 

The  Facial  Massage,  if  part  of  the  establishment, 
should  be  in  a  booth  similar  to  the  hairdressing  booth. 
The  chair  for  this  purpose  should  be  one  that  reclines 
similar  to  the  Morris  chair,  or  those  used  in  barber 
shops.     A  small  bracket  with  a  drawer  to  hold  cream. 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL.  15 

powder,  etc.,  can  be  attached  to  the  wall  in  front  of 
chair,  and  on  it  placed  a  mirror  similar  to  those  used 
in  hairdressing  parlors;  or  a  small  table  with  drawer 
can  be  used  in  place  of  brackets. 

The  same  room  or  booth  can  be  used  for  electrolysis 
or  chiropody,  if  satisfactory  light  can  be  arranged;  day- 
light is  best.  If  it  cannot  be  had,  artificial  light,  with 
a  shade,  can  be  arranged  close  to  the  face  or  the  foot 
as  the  case  may  require. 

No  additional  fixtures  are  required  for  electrolysis, 
except  the  battery  and  medicine  for  doing  the  work. 
For  chiropody,  a  small  foot  tub  is  necessary  and  medi- 
cine cabinet  within  reach  of  operator  while  seated  on  a 
stool  for   the   work. 

Any  of  this  furniture  or  fixtures  described  can  be 
had  at  Moler  Supply  House,  39  Peck  Court,  Chicago, 
111. 

One  can  keep  pace  with  fashions  in  hairdressing  as 
they  change  by  subscribing  for  any  of  the  hairdress- 
ing journals.  The  subscription  price  is  usually  $1.00 
a  year.  The  styles  that  are  in  vogue  to-day  are  soon 
out  of  date,  and  new  ones  taking  their  places.  It  there- 
fore is  as  necessary  after  becoming  adept  at  the  work 
to  keep  pace  with  styles,  as  it  is  to  learn  it  properly  in 
the  beginning.  This  is  a  profession  in  which  one  can 
display  rare  taste  and   skill  if  studied  carefully. 


16  HAIRDRlilShJEKS'  MANUAL. 

Many  ladies  who  do  not  care  to  go  to  the  expense  of 
fitting  up  an  establishment,  create  a  residence  trade. 
By  this  method  the  hairdresser  calls  at  the  customer's 
home  by  appointment,  and  is  entitled  to  a  better  fee 
than  is  usually  asked  in  the  hairdressing  parlor.  There 
is  probably  no  woriv  that  will  pay  better  than  resident 
trade,  when  one  is  able  to  do  manicuring  and  massage 
in  connection  with  hairdressing. 

In  the  pages  following  every  branch  of  the  work,  as 
taught  in  our  college,  is  taken  up  in  detail,  and  while 
it  is  not  expected  that  you  will  become  an  expert 
from  the  instructions  that  this  book  gives,  you  will 
be  greatly  benefited  by  it. 

SELECTION  AND  CARE  OF  TOOLS. 
There  is  but  one  grade  of  tools  used  by  professional 
hairdressers.  They  are  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  work, 
and  are  entirely  different  from  those  used  in  private 
use.  They  must  be  kept  in  proper  order  to  do  proper 
work  and  by  following  instructions  closely  in  this 
line,  it  will  save  a  great  deal  of  annoyance  in  your 
future  work. 

CURLING  IRONS. 
In    selecting    irons    different    sizes    are    needed.      The 
waving  irons  run  in  sizes  from  No.  1  to  No.  5.    The  No, 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAIv.  17 

4  is  the  ordinary  or  size  that  is  most  used.  The  pat- 
tern known  as  the  "Marcel"  waver  is  the  one  most 
used  at  present.  Formerly  the  French  waving-  iron 
took  its  place.  For  curling-,  the  irons  run  in  sizes 
same  as  the  wavers,  from  No.  1  to  No.  5,  That  used 
for  curling^  the  short  hair  around  the  temples  and 
neck  is  No.  1  and  that  used  for  curling-  long-  hair  is 
No.  4.  This  is  also  used  in  waving-,  crimping-  and 
curling"  long-  hair,  as  well  as  hair  trimmed  to  be 
curled  all  over.  The  size  used  for  large  curls  to  ap- 
pear as  natural  curls  is  No.  5.     A  complete  outfit  con- 


sists of  one  of  each  size  in  both  wavers  and  curlers, 
althoug^h  a  g-reat  many  hairdressers  possess  only 
about  half  this  many.  In  selecting  the  brands,  only 
the  best  French  iron  should  be  used  as  the  cheaper 
brands  soon  warp  with  the  heat  and  do  not  giye 
the  hair  the  appearance  of  a  natural,  smooth  curl. 
In  selecting,  always  get  the  smooth  ones  that  close 
tightly  together  from  one  end  to  the  other.  These 
irons  are  all  without  the  spring  which  is  found  in 
irons  used   in    priyate  work.    Great   care   should   be 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL- 


used  in  heating-  the  irons  not  to  get  them  too  hot,  as 
in  overheating-  they  become  roug^h  and  usually  spring- 
out  of  shape.  Should  be  very  careful  when  the  iron 
is  hot,  not  to  spring-  it  as  when  it  cools  it  will  not 
close  tig-htly.  It  should  be  kept  in  a  perfectly  dry 
place  to  avoid  rusting-.  It  is  well  to  keep  them 
wrapped  in  a  dry  cloth  or  chamois  skin.  As  they  be- 
come old  and  burned,  they  can  be  smoothed  and  re- 
polished  with  sand  paper. 

HAIR  BRUSHES. 

The  best  brush  that  can  be  used  for  ladies'  hair  is 
one  known  as  the  air  cushion  brush.  The  best  g-rades 
are  those  made  of  genuine  bristle,  and   of  course  are 


the  most  expensiye,  although  there  is  a  similar  wire 
brush  made  of  good  quality  as  serviceable,  and  an- 
swers the  purpose  almost  as  well.  The  air  cushion 
brush  is  different  from  the  ordinary  hair  brush  from 
the  fact  that  it  is  more  pliable  and  elastic,  which  en- 
ables one  to  brush  snarls  from  long  hair  better  than 
the  solid  back  brush. 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


10 


COMBS. 


Jht  r.e-^ 


"REFORM*'  Gorr^hjiisio. 


The  hard  rubber  comb  is  the  one  that  has  taken  lead 
among  the  hairdressers  recently.  It  is  one  that  is 
strong  and  serviceable.  The  teeth  are  more  easily 
kept  clean,  on  account  of  their  pyramid  shape.  They 
are  almost  unbreakable.  These  combs  are  made  with 
all  coarse  teeth,  or  with  one-half  coarse,  and  one-half 
fine.    Probably  the  latter  is  the  best  for  all  uses. 

There  is  a  horn  comb  with  metal  back  much  cheaper 
and  quite  durable,  but  does  not  give  the  same  satisfac- 
tion. The  aluminum  comb,  among  the  cheaper  grades, 
is  probably  the  best^  from  the  fact  that  it  can  be 
sterilized.  The  celluloid  comb  should  never  be  used 
in  singeing  the  hair,  as  it  is  inflammable  and  danger- 
ous. 

Combs  and  brushes  should  be  washed  at  regular  in- 
tervals, in  10  per  cent,  solution  of  carbolic  acid  or 
formalin.  The  ordinary  barber  shears  are  the  best 
for  trimming  the  hair. 


20 


hairderssers'  manuai,. 


An  alcohol  lamp  is  necessary  to  complete  the  outfit, 
as  in  calls  to  private  houses  it  would  be  the  only 
means  of  heating  the  iron.  A  small  lamp,  as  shown 
in  cut,  is  best  for  this  use,  and  should  be  heated  by 
alcohol  in  order  to  keep  it  from  blacking-  the  iron  and 
making-  it  unfit  for  use. 


WIGS  AND  SWITCHES. 

A  wig  is  not  always  necessary,  but  is  very  useful 
in  serving  to  show  difi'erent  or  new  styles  of  hair- 
dressing.  It  is  also  very  convenient  to  have  for  prac- 
tice use,  and  can  be  used  in  practicing-  new  styles  as 
they  are  brought  forth.  A  switch  is  very  convenient 
to  have  as  in  many  styles  of  hair  dressing-  this  is 
necessary.  It  is  the  t>ame  as  a  wig-  which  only  adds 
to  your  practice  of  new  styles.  Customers  who  wear 
switches  oftentimes  ask  for  the  styles  that  appear  in 
fashion  plates,  and  by  having  one  of  these  for  j'our 
practice  use  you  will  be  ab'e  to  accomodate  all. 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAI^. 


21 


FIRST  WORK. 
In   beginning,   first  prepare   by   spread- 


22  HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAt. 

ing-  the  hair  cloth  or  apron  over  the  person  and  pin 
it  closely  around  the  neck  to  protect  the  dress.  Then 
take  down  the  hair  by  removing  all  the  hairpins  and 
allowing-  the  hair  to  hang-  straight  down  the  back. 
A.  chair  of  the  ordinary  height  with  low  back  should 
be  used  so  that  the  back  will  not  interfere  with  the 
hair  while  being  dressed. 

COMBING. 

First,  part  the  hair  in  the  centre,  then  on  the 
sides  dividing  it  in  four  parts.  Comb  each  division 
separately  by  holding  the  hair  tightly  close  to  the 
head  and  beginning  at  the  extreme  ends  of  the  hair 
and  working  up  as  the  snarls  are  removed. 

In  parting  the  hair,  hold  the  comb  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger,  drawing  a  straight  line  from 
nearly  the  crown  of  the  head  to  the  back  of  the  ear. 
After  the  four  divisions  haye  been  combed  out  separ- 
ately, then  comb  it  altogether  straight  down  the  back, 
which  leaves  it  ready  for  crimping  and  dressing. 

CRIMPING. 

First,  part  the  hair  in  the  center  from  the  fore- 
head about  half  way  back  to  the  crown,  and  then 
on  the  sides  to  the  back  of  the  ear. 

These  lines  must  vary  according  to  the  thicknessof 


HAIRDRESSERS''    MANLAL,. 


23 


PARTING. 


24 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 


tnc  nair  or  shape  of  the  head.  In  thick  hair,  a  small 
proportion  should  be  divided  off,  and  in  thinner  the 
part  should  be  farther  back.  After  this  division  is 
made,  another  pari  should  be  made  from  near  the 
back  of  the  ear  around  the  back  of  the  head  to  the 
other  side,  leaving^  the  crown  in  a  division  by  itself, 
and  should  be  twisted  and  pinned  up  out  of  the  way. 
The  balance  of  the  hair  should  be  crimped,  curled  or 
waved. 
In    all    first-class     establishments     the    irons   are 


GAS  STVOE. 

heated  by  gas  heaters,  a  small  stove  or  burner  made 
especially  for  this  purpose. 

The  iron  should  be  put  on  the  burner  three  or  four 
minutes  before  ready  for  use.  Hair  should  be  parted 
in  small  strands  for  crimping-,  beginning-  at  the  back 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


25 


CRIMPING. 


26  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

of  the  head  near  the  crown  and  working-  forward  and 
down  until  the  side  is  finished.  Curl  both  sides  alike 
and  then  the  back;  just  enough  hair  must  be  divided 
in  each  strand  to  fill  the  iron,  making-  a  space  of 
about  an  inch  square. 

After  the  first  strand  is  separated,  take  the  iron 
from  the  burner  and  test  the  temperature  by  closing 
it  on  a  piece  of  paper.  If  it  does  not  scorch  the  paper 
it  will  not  burn  the  hair,  but  it  must  be  made  as  hot 
as  possible  and  not  burn. 

If  the  iron  is  overheated,  it  can  be  brought  to  the 
proper  tempsrature  by  twirling-  it  in  the  hand  until 
cooled  sufficiently  for  use.  It  should  never  be  dipped 
in  water  to  cool,  as  it  soon  spoils  the  iron,  in  this 
way,  causing-  it  to  rust.  With  little  practice  you  will 
be  able  to  test  the  temperature  by  holding-  it  close  to 
the  face. 

Hold  the  iron  closed  in  the  right  hand,  pick  up  the 
strand  of  hair  divided  for  the  curl  in  the  left  hand; 
hold  the  iron  about  one  inch  from  the  head  and  be- 
gin by  winding  the  hair  around  the  iron,  starting 
in  the  center  of  the  iron  and  winding  towards  the 
end  until  about  one-half  of  the  length  of  the  strand 
is  crimped,  then  turn  the  iron  down  to  the  head, 
crimping  it  close  to  the  roots. 

Hair  should  be  wound  around  the  iron  from  the 
^ront  to  the  back,  and  on  the  back  of  the  head  begin- 


HAIBDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  27 

ning  at  the  upper  part  aod  work  down,  winding  the 
hair  around  the  iron  from  the  bottom  up. 

When  through  curling,  unpin  the  straight  hair,  the 
part  that  has  been  pinned  up,  comb  it  out,  holding 
the  hair  close  to  the  head  with  the  left  hand  and 
combing  it  out  with  the  right,  beginning  at  the  ends 
of  the  hair  and  working  toward  the  roots.  After  the 
snarls  are  all  taken  out,  comb  the  hair  up  and  tie 
it  close  to  the  roots  with  a  string,  letting  the  ends 
hang  down  the  back,  then  comb  the  crimps  out  at  the 
back  of  the  head  first  by  taking  the  comb  in  the  right 
hand  close  to  the  head,  drawing  it  through  the  curls, 
giving  it  a  loose,  wayy  appearance;  then  comb  out  the 
front,  one  side  at  a  time;  gather  all  of  the  crimped 
hair  up  by  bringing  the  back  hair  up  with  the  left 
hand  and  gathering  the  front  in  the  right  hand,  let- 
ting the  ends  fall  between  the  thumb  and  the  finger  of 
the  left,  then  retie  all  of  the  hair  together  at  the 
crown  of  the  head,  leaving  the  crimped  hair  loose 
enough  to  give  a  fluffy  appearance. 

Now  you  haye  the  hair  ready  to  dress  in  any  style 
the  customer  wishes.  The  style  that  is  used  most  at 
present  is  put  up  by  dividing  the  hair  crossyvays  of 
the  head,  this  leayes  the  hair  divided  into  a  top  and 
bottom  part.  Take  the  top  part  in  a  twist  or  coil 
and  pin  it  in  place  as  shown. 


28  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

This  can  be  done  up  in  a  knot  or  pinned  in  coils 
to  suit  the  style  your  customer  desires.  The  lower 
half  or  part  that  you  have  left,  twist  in  a  coil  hold- 
ing- the  ends  of  the  hair  with  the  rig-ht  hand,  take 
the  left  near  the  centre  of  the  strand,  then  bring-  the 
ends  up  to  the  head  and  turn  the  hair  over  to  make 
a  loop. 

Be  sure  that  the  ends  of  the  hair  come  under  the 
loop,  then  make  a  second  loop  with  the  ends  of  the 
hair  at  the  side  of  the  head  finishing  by  pinning  the 
ends  under  the  loops  crossing  them  at  the  back  of  the 
head  or  curl  the  ends  and  pin  them  down  in  the  cen- 
ter. This  is  the  simplest  style  of  dressing  the  hair 
and  after  once  learned  the  styles  as  they  change  are 
easily  followed.  In  pinning  up  the  first  or  top  coil- 
let  the  ends  of  the  hair  remain  on  the  left  side  of  the 
head,  and  in  putting  up  the  bottom  coil,  bring-  the 
ends  to  the  right,  and  as  you  finish  pinning  the  ends 
of  the  hair,  let  them  cross  each  other  at  the  back 
of  the  head,  otherwise  you  would  not  haye  sufficient 
hair  to  pin  to. 

This  completes  a  plain  hair-dress  without  bangs. 
This  style  of  hair-dress  can  be  used  with  a  pompadour 
roll  or  a  rat.  They  are  made  of  wire  or  hair,  and 
can  be  used  on  the  front  of  the  head,  the  sides  or 
back.  They  are  used  by  putting  them  on  the  head 
after  the  hair  has  been  divided  the  same  as  it  would 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


29 


be  for  crimping-.  When  used  on  top,  pin  the  roll  on 
each  side  and  in  the  center,  then  comb  the  hair, 
either  crimped  or  straig-ht,  over  the  roll,  covering 
it  entirely   and  giving   the   hair  the  appearance   of 


PUI'FIXG. 
pompadour,  often  called  the  pompadour  roll.      When 
used  on   the   sides,    comb   the   hair  over  the  roll  at 
each  side  and  comb  it  back  flat  on  top,  allowing-  the 


:;0  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

hair  to  roll  out  oti  each  side  only.     It  can  be  used  in 
che  back  the  same  way^ 

The  hair  can  be  dressed  in  puffs  after  it  is  crimped 
instead  of  coils,  which  is  done  by  dividing-  the  hair  in 
four  or  five  strands,  parting-  it  crosswise  in  as  many 
strands  as  you  want  puffs.  Comb  the  back  strand  out 
straig-ht,  do  not  twist  it  in  a  coil  as  in  dressing-  the 
former  style.  Hold  the  ends  of  the  hair  in  the  left 
hand  between  the  thumb  and  the  fing-er.  Place  the 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand  about  an  inch  from  the 
left  and  then  bring  the  end  of  the  hair  oyer  the  right 
finger  and  roll  the  strand  up  by  bringing  one  finger 
over  the  other  inside  of  the  little  loop  you  have 
formed.  When  rolled  to  the  head,  hold  it  there  in 
a  puff  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  and  spread 
it  with  the  right  hand,  pinning  the  side  of  the  puff 
close  to  the  nead.  Then  remove  the  fingei  of  the 
left  hand  and  pin  that  side  the  same,  then  so  on 
with  the  next  one  until  all  the  puffs  are  made,  one 
after  the  other.  To  avoid  having  the  puffs  drop 
away  from  each  other,  put  an  invisible  hairpin  in 
the  center  of  the  puff,  pinning  them  together.  The 
best  way  to  follow  new  styles  is  to  watch  the  fashion 
plates  that  come  out  with  the  Hairdressing  Journal, 
ard  practice  them  on  a  wig  before  trying  them  on 
your  customer. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MxiNUAL.  31 

HIGH   HAIRDRESS— FRENCH   DOUBLE    DIP. 

In  this  style,  tie  the  hair  after  parting  and  curling, 
same  as  in  the  former  styles,  except  that  it  should  be 
tied  as  high  as  the  hair  will  allow.     Begin  by  putting 


TIEING. 

up  the  front,  standing  on  the  right  side  of  the  customer, 
putting  up  the  left  dip  first. 

The  dip  is  made  by  first  roughing  the  h?ir  with  the 
comb,  which  is  accomplished  by  sliding  the  comb  back- 


32 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


ward  through  the  hair  toward  the  roots.  Great  care 
must  be  taken  not  to  allow  the  teeth  of  the  comb  to 
extend  through  the  under  portion.  After  roughing., 
smooth  the  under  side  by  combing  toward  the  ends. 


ROUGHING. 

In  making  the  dip,  first  twist  the  ends  of  the  hair 
to  the  right  with  the  left  hand,  keeping  the  first  and 
second  finger  of  the  right  hand  about  an  ii;ch  from  the 
roots    of   the  hair   and   draw   the   entire   coil    over   the 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


33 


finger,  making  a  puff  as  shown  in  the  cut.  In  draw- 
ing the  finger  from  underneath  the  dip  spread  the  hair 
into  a  roll. 


FORMING     DIPS. 

The  second  dip  is  accomplished  in  the  same  way  as 
the  first.  In  dressing  the  sides,  divide  the  hair  cross- 
wise into  two  parts,  bringing  the  upper  half  straight 
up  and  pin  at  the  crown  and  then  take  the  remaining 
half  and  pin  over  the  other,  excepting  that  it  is  pinned 


34 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


a   little    farther    back.      Both    sides    are    dressed    alike. 
The  back  of  the  hair  is  now  ready  to  be  dressed. 

Part  the  hair  crosswise  and  rough  the  upper  half  the 
same  as  the  front  dip,  and  twist  from  left  to  right  in 
a  coil,  leaving  the  rough  portion  inside  the  coil.     This 


HIGH    FRENCH    KNOT. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


35 


will  leave  the  coil  loose  and  fluffy,  with  a  smooth  ex- 
terior. Twist  into  a  long  coiffure  by  taking  the  right 
hand  with  the  palm  up  underneath  the  coil  and  turn 
it,  leaving  the  back  of  the  hand  up.  Pin  in  place, 
leaving  the  high  French  knot.  The  remainder  portion 
of  this  strand  is  puffed  as  shown  in  former  cut  (puf- 
fing), and  pin  in  place  at  the  side  of  the  coiffure. 

Now,   take  the   remainder  of  the   hair,  twist  into   a 
coil  and  make  a  half  knot  by  holding  the  coil  with  the 


BOW    KNOT. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


FRONT    VIEW — COMPLETED. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


37 


BACK  VIEW — COMPLETEDo 


38  HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 

right  hand  a  little  way  from  the  head,  and  taking  the 
first  finger  of  the  right  hand  with  the  palm  of  the 
hand  up  and  form  a  loop  by  turning  the  hand  over, 
leaving  the  next  strand  around  the  first  finger,  then 
bring  the  strand  over  and  draw  upward  through  the 
loop  so  that  it  forms  a  bow  knot,  and  pin  down,  mak- 
ing the  form  of  a  three-leaf  clover. 

Ornaments  should  be  worn  on  the  left  side. 
SIDE    DIP— LOW    HAIRDRESS. 

The  front  of  this  is  put  up  the  same  as  in  the  former 
style  except  that  one  dip  is  made  instead  of  two  and 
placed  a  little  to  the  left.  Tie  back  hair  up  as  in  the 
former  style  except  have  it  a  little  below  the  crown. 
The  hair  is  now  ready  to  be  dressed.  Divide  it  into 
two  parts  by  parting  crosswise.  First,  twist  into  a  roll 
and  make  a  half  figure  8  by  holding  the  ends  of  the 
hair  with  the  left  hand.  Take  the  first  finger  of  the 
right  hand  underneath  the  roll,  making  a  loop  by  turn- 
ing the  right  hand  over  with  the  first  finger  still  in 
the  knot.  Then  bring  the  strand  around  the  knot  with 
the  left  hand,  forming  a  puff.  Then  pin  in  place  and 
make  a  puff  with  the  ends  of  the  hair,  making  the  I.t^^. 
puff  at  the  side  of  the  first  one  as  shown. 

This  puff  is  made  different  from  the  former  ones,  um 
the  remaining  ends  are   long  and  thin.     Hold  the  ends 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


39 


HALF   FIGURE    EIGHT. 

of  the  hair  with  the  right  hand  and  wind  it  around  the 
first  three  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  flatly  rolling  up 
the  balance  of  the  strand  to  the  head  and  pin  in  place 
at  the  side  of  the  coiffure.     Twist  the  remaining  portion 


40 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


PUFF  NO.  2. 


of  the  hair  to  the  right  tightly,  and  when  doubled 
back  it  will  form  a  half  figure  eight.  Leave  it  long 
enough  so  that  it  comes  about  two  inches  below  the 
roots  of  the  lower  hair.  Pin  in  place.  Twist  the 
balance  of  the  strand  tightly  to  the  right  and  place 
crosswise  of  the  head  into  whole  figure  eight.  Tuck  the 
remaining  short  ends  underneath  and  pin  in  place. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL.  41 


BACK    VIEW — COMPLETEc 


42 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


MARCEL  WAVE. 

This  style  of  waving  takes  the  place  of  crimping  and 
can  be  used  with  any  style  of  hairdress.  It  must  be 
done  with  a  particular  style  of  iron,  called  the  Marcel 
Iron.  \Vlien  properly  done  the  hair  remains  waved 
longer  and  has  the  appearance  of  a  naturally  wavy 
head  of  hair. 


Before  commencing,  iLhampoo  the  hair  and  dry  well. 
Begin  waving  the  hair  on  the  right  hand  side.  Take 
a  strand,  not  too  thick,  and  make  the  first  wave  just 
above  the  ear.  To  obtain  the  first  wave,  the  strand 
of  hair  must  be  held  by  the  left  hand.  Irons  should 
be  held  perpendicularly,  as  shown  in  cut,  in  the  right 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


43 


hand  and  the  hair  should  be  pressed  with  them  with 
a  slightly  upward  movement.  The  second  wave  is 
obtained  by  sliding  the  irons  a  little  farther  along  the 
strand  of  hair,  then  pressing  them  with  a  slightly 
downward  movement.  This  operation  should  be  con- 
tinued right  along  to  the  end  of  the  strand. 

The  first  strand   having  been   properly  waved   in   its 


full  length,  a  small  part  of  it  should  be  taken  and 
joined  to  the  next  in  order  to  show  exactly  where  the 
irons  are  to  be  placed  along  this  second  strand,  so 
that  when  the  hair  is  waved  all  over  and  nicely 
combed  all  the  waves  will  fall  properly  into  each 
other. 
K  The  right  side  being  entirely  finished,  the  left  should 


44 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


be  proceeded  with.  The  position  in  which  the  irons 
must  be  held  should  be  carefully  noted  and  care  must 
be  taken  to  always  keep  the  hollow  groove  in  the  irons 
on  the  top.  Proceed  in  the  same  way,  taking  up  a 
small  part  of  the  first  wave  strand,  in  order  to  properly 
indicate  the  places  where  the  second  strand  should  be 
waved. 


The  sides  being  waved,  continue  with  the  strand  at 
the  top  of  the  head,  taking  a  small  part  of  the  waved 
lock  from  the  right  side  as  an  indication  as  to  where 
the  waves  are  to  be  made. 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL. 


45 


In  oiuer  to  wave  the  nape  of  the  neck,  the  head 
should  be  bent  slightly  forward,  and  the  strand  already 
finished  fixed  up   on  the   top.     The  little  locks  at  the 


nape   of   the   neck    should    then   be  held   with    the   left 
hand  and  waved  with  the  right  as  previously  shown. 

Ladies  can  easily  keep  the  waves  from  disappearing 
by  touching  them  up  with  the  irons,  even  when  the 
hair  is  dressed. 


46  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAl,. 

TRIMMING. 

Many  styles  of  bang's  are  worn  at  different  times, 
andthe  form  of  trim  ming-,  like  dressing-,  can  be  learned 
from  the  fashion  plates.  The  bang-  worn  on  the  top 
and  sides  is  made  by  parting"  the  hair  crosswise  from 
the  top  of  one  ear  to  the  other.  If  the  hair  is  parted  in 
the  center,  comb  each  side  down;  then  take  up  a 
small  lock,  beg-inning  at  the  top  or  the  part,  and  cut 
it  off  the  proper  leng-th,  usually  from  two  to  three 
inches,  depending-  entirely  upon  the  shape  of  the 
forehead  ;  then  pick  up  the  next  lock  under- 
neath, cut  the  same  length,  but  be  careful  and  hold 
the  hair  down  when  cutting-  instead  of  straight  up, 
and  so  on  until  all  the  bangs  are  trimmed  the  proper 
length.  Be  careful  to  get  each  side  alike.  Comb  the 
short  hair  forward  over  the  forehead  and  cut  in  a  V 
shape,  a  bout  even  with  the  eyebrows.  Then  comb  the 
sides  out,  holding  it  between  the  thumb  and  finger  of 
the  left  hand,  cutting  it  even,  making  it  gradually 
shorter  close  to  the  ear,  then  comb  it  straight  and 
trim  the  lower  edge  nearly  to  the  bottom  of  the  ear. 
Other  styles  can  be  trimmed  in  the  same  way,  follow- 
ing new  fashion  plates. 

In  case  the  hair  is  to  be  cut  all  over,  it  must  be 
trimmed  the  same  as  a  barber  shingles  hair,  and  foi- 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  47 

low  the  same  line  of  instructions  as  given  in  our 
Barbers'  Manual, except  that  the  neck  is  never  shaved. 
Be  very  cautious  and  not  get  the  lower  part  of  the 
hair  trimmed  close  to  the  head,  as  it  must  be  left  long- 
enough  to  curl.  This  is  the  only  difference  in  trim- 
ming short  hair  for  ladies  and  men. 

SHAMPOOING. 

Comb  the  hair  out  the  same  as  in  dressing  it  to  pre- 
pare it  for  shampoo.  There  are  a  great  many  sub- 
stances used  in  giving  a  shampoo.  The  kind  most 
fayored  by  hair  dressers  is  the  liquid,  a  formula  of 
which  is  given  in  the  back  part  of  the  book.  This  is 
applied  by  using  the  regular  barbers'  bottle,  so  made 
that  you  may  hold  it  by  the  neck  and  apply  the  sham- 
poo as  wanted.  Hold  the  bottle  in  the  left  hand,  pour 
on  a  small  portion  at  a  time  and  rub  with  the  right. 
This  will  form  a  lather,  and  a  sufficient  amount  must 
be  used  to  thoroughly  wet  or  suds  the  hair.  Start 
on  the  top  and  work  the  suds  down  to  the  sides, 
being  careful  not  to  let  the  lather  get  into  the  custo- 
mer's eyes  or  on  the  face.  Then  gather  the  long 
hair  up  from  the  back  of  the  head  in  the  right  hand 
and  apply  the  shampoo  with  the  left  until  the  hair 
Is  thoroughly  lathered  to  the  ends.  Then  set  the 
bottle  down,  hold  the  long   hair   up   oyer  the  head 


4^  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

without  allowing-  it  to  tang-le  and  rub  the  roots  of  the 
hair  with  the  risrht.     Never  rub  the  long-  hair  in  such 


SHAMPOOING. 


a  way    to  tangle     it.     After     the     scalp     has   been 
thoroughly    cleaned    and   rubbed,   your  customer  is 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  49 

ready  for  the  rinsing.  In  preparing  your  customer 
you  should  be  very  cautious  in  putting  the  towel 
around  the  back  of  the  neck  to  protect  the  dress. 

Where  you  have  a  hot  and  cold  water  apparatus, 
see  that  the  water  is  perfectly  temperatured  betore 
gettingyourcustomer  under  the  spray.  In  preparing 
the  wash  stand,  lay  a  towel  on  the  stand  that  the 
customers  may  rest  their  elbows  on  it  in  leaning  over 
the  bowl.  A  stool  of  the  proper  height  is  most  con- 
venier*^  ^^or  your  customer  to  sit  on  while  the  hair  is 
being  ruioed.  After  the  wash  stand  is  prepared,  take 
your  customer  to  the  stand  and  have  the  head  bent 
over  far  enough  so  that  the  water  will  not  run  down 
the  neck  while  being  applied.  Take  the  spray  in  the 
left  hand,  and  as  the  water  is  turned  on,  be  careful 
that  it  is  not  allowed  to  wet  the  collar  of  the  dress. 
Turn  the  hair  down  over  the  head  at  the  top  and 
begin  rinsing  at  the  roots.  First  thoroughly  cleanse 
the  scalp  and  use  sufficient  water  to  get  the  soap 
all  out.  Work  carefully  down  to  the  ends  of  the  hair 
without  tangling  it.  The  greatest  miiitake  is  in  not 
using  sufficient  amount  of  water  to  thoroughly  cleanse 
it,  which  will  cause  it  to  be  sticky  in  drying. 

After  the  hair  is  thoroughly  rinsed,  wring  as  much 
water  out  of  it  as  possible,  and  dry  it  enough  so  that 
the  water  will  not  run  down  the  neck  or  over  the 
eyes  when  the  customer  raises  up  from  the  bowl. 


50 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


In  taking-  the  customer  back  to  the  chair,  hold  the 
hair  on  the  top  of  the  head  with  a  towel  placed  over 
the  hair  in  such  a  way  as  to  protect  the  face  and 
clothing. 


DRYING. 
Beg-in  the  drying-  by  letting  the  hair  fall  down  over 
the  back  and  thoroughly  rubbing  the  scalp  with  a 


HAIRDRESSERS'    MANUAL.  51 

;.oweJ  antjl  partly  dried,  and  complete  by  fanning-  or 
laying-  it  over  'ihe  electric  or  gas  hair  dryer.Hair  dryers 
are  objected,  to  by  a  great  many  customers,  and  in 
this  ca.s<i  the  hair  skould  be  fanned  with  the  left 
hand,  and  at  the  same  time  rub  the  head  with  the 
rig-ht,  allowing  the  hair  to  pass  through  it.  , 

Hair  dried  without  rubbing  is  more  harsh  and  stiff 
than  if  it  is  rubbed  well  while  being-  dried.  In 
medium  hair  the  drying  usually  requires  from  twenty 
minutes  to  a  half  hour. 

After  the  hair  is  thoroughly  dried,  it  is  well  to 
brush  it  until  it  becomes  soft  and  g-lossy,  then  it  is 
ready  for  combing-  and  dressing-  Hair  immediately 
after  being  shampooed  is  harder  to  handle  than  be- 
fore. 

There  are  many  different  kinds  of  shampoo,  such 
as  the  eg-g-  shampoo,  which  is  done  the  same  as  with 
soap  except  that  the  substance  is  prepared  by  using- 
eg-g-s  well  beaten,  same  as  g-iyen  in  the  formula  in 
the  back  of  the  book. 

A  dry  shampoo  is  usually  g-iven  by  washing-  the  hair 
thoroughly  in  alcohol  and  rubbing  until  dried  or 
evaporated.  No  water  is  used  for  this  style  of  sham- 
poo. 

Where  the  customer  prefers  their  hair  to  be  washed 
with  certain  brands  of  soap  use  the  soap  in  the 
left  hand  and  the  water  bottle  in  the  right,  and  apply 


53  HAIRDRESSER,^'  MANUAI^. 

water  and  rub  the  soap  on  the  head  until  sufficient 
lather  is  obtained. 

Many  times  a  tonic  is  required  after  the  sham- 
poo. Apply  it  after  the  hair  has  been  partly  dried, 
then  finish  drying-  the  hair  so  that  the  tonic  as  well 
as  dampness  may  be  evaporated. 

Sea  foam  cannot  be  used  in  ladies*  work,  unless 
washed  out  the  same  as  shampoo. 

SINGEilNG. 

This  process  of  burning-  the  ends  of  the  hair  is  for 
the  purpose  of  keeping^  it  from  splitting  at  the  ends 
and  is  recommended  for  falling-  hair.  When  it  be- 
comes dead  or  dry,  it  splits  and  spoils  the  growth. 
By  burning  the  ends,  it  closes  the  pores  and  keeps  the 
fluid  in  the  hair  and  gives  it  a  livelier  and  healthier 
appearance.  It  often  stops  hair  from  falling-  out  and 
is  one  of  the  best  means  to  invigorate  dull  or  dead 
hair. 

Singeing  is  done  with  a  wax  taper  made  especially 
for  the  purpose  or  by  an  alcohol  burner  that  allows  a 
small  flame  to  peep  through  a  perforated  surface. 
Wax  tapers  are  usually  recommended  and  can  be  ob- 
tained at  any  wholesale  house  or  you  may  use  the 
ordinary  gas  lighting  taper. 

The  hair  is  taken  down  and  combed  out,  the  same 
as  preparing  it  for  a  shampoo.     Take  a  small  strand 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL  53 

sepaio-Lt^lv  and  twist  it  firmly  in  order  to  compel  the 
short  ends  of   the  hair   to  spring-  out  from  the  coil 
also  to  prevent  from  catchinf,^  fire    as  the  sing-er  is 
passed  over  the  hair  to  catch  the  protruding-  ends. 
Hair  is  often  trimmed  in  this  way,  but  in  trimming 


SINGEING. 

't  does  not  prevent  the  hair  from  re-splitting-  as  in 
singeing.  Continue  clear  around  the  head  until  all 
the  ends  have  been  touched.  When  hair  is  uneven 
at  the  ends,  it  can  be  trimmed  with  the  shears  or 
singed  evenly  by  combing  the  hair  straig-ht  down  the 


54 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


back  and  touching-  the  long-  ends  with  the  sing-er  or 
shears. 

After  sing-eing-  hair  should  be  well  brushed  in  order 
to  brush  the  burnt  ends  off  and  avoid  the  appearance 
of  singed  hair. 


CI,IPPING. 

Where  a  head  is  to  be  sing-ed  and  shampooed  both, 
always  shampoo  first  as  it  remoyes  the  oil  from  the 
hair,  makes  it  lighter  and  easier  to  get  at  with  the 
singer. 


HAIBDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  55 

BLEACHING. 

In  bleaching-,  remember  that  the  hair  must  be  thor- 
cug^hly  shampooed  and  dried  as  the  bleach  will  not 
take  effect  on  oily  hair. 

Comb  the  hair  out  the  same  as  preparing-  it  for 
dressing-,  part  it  in  the  center  as  far  back  as  the 
crown  and  begin  by  applying-  the  bleach  with  a  tooth 
brush  at  the  roots  of  the  hair  along-  the  part.  Then 
divide  the  hair  off  in  strands  and  apply  the  bleach 
until  the  roots  of  the  hair  haye  been  thoroughly 
dampened.  Rub  the  bleach  in  at  the  roots  and  be 
careful  that  no  hair  is  missed.  Apply  the  bleach 
with  a  tooth  brush  as  far  down  on  the  strand  as  is 
necessary,  the  balance  or  the  ends  of  the  hair  can 
be  dipped  into  the  bowl  of  bleach. 

Bleach  is  not  injurious  to  the  scalp  and  should  be 
applied  to  the  roots  of  the  hair,  although  it  is  not 
well  to  soak  it  as  you  would  with  a  sponge.  The 
material  is  quite  expensive  and  should  be  used  spar- 
ingly. In  dipping  the  ends  of  the  hair  in  the  bowl, 
wring  them  out  carefully  to  prevent  its  dripping  as 
the  bleach  removes  the  color  from  anything- it  touch- 
es. In  case  the  ends  cannot  be  wrung  out  to  prevent 
them  dripping,  bring-  the  ends  up  over  the  top  of  the 
head  and  rub  them  thoroughly  among-  the  roots  of 
the  hair. 


S6  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

Peroxide  of  Hydrog-en  is  about  the  only  material 
used  for  this  purpose.  More  than  one  application  is 
usually  necessary,  although  this  depends  entirely  on 
what  shade  the  customer  wants  her  hair.  Each  ap- 
plication lightens  it  to  a  certain  degree.  Black  hair 
is  bleached  much  easier  than  the  lighter  shades. 

DYEING. 

There  are  a  great  many  kinds  of  dyes  used  in  ladies 
work.  Probably  the  most  to  be  recommended  at 
present  is  the  kind  where  one  application  will  do  the 
work.  In  using  this  sort  of  a  dye,  you  must  select 
the  shade  you  want,  and  after  being  applied  it  re- 
quires time  in  the  air  and  sun  light  to  bring"  it  to  the 
proper  shade.  Other  kinds  of  dye  are  applied  by 
using  two  ingredients  usually  called  No.  1  and  No  2, 
or  A  and  B.  This  is  instantaneous  and  comes  in  seven 
different  shades. 

In  dyeing,  first  shampoo  the  hair  and  see  that  it  is 
thoroughly  cleaned  and  dried  the  same  as  in  bleach- 
ing, then  apply  the  first  ingredient  or  No.  1  with  a 
tooth  brush  the  same  as  bleach,  only  being  careful 
to  keep  it  from  the  scalp  as  it  colors  anything  it 
touches.  Apply  it  the  same  as  bleach,  and  as  soon  as 
No.  1  is  on  and  dried,  apply  No.  2  in  the  same  way. 
No.  2  is  the  one  that  colors.     In  applying  both  ingre- 


HAIEi)i^ESSERS'  MANUAL.  57 

dients,  the  hair  should  be  thoroughly  rubbed  and  wet 
with  the  tooth  brush,  being-  careful  that  none  of  it 
escapes.  The  ends  of  the  hair  cannot  be  dipped  the 
same  as  in  bleaching,  and  roust  be  applied  to  the 
ends  the  same  as  the  roots.  This  is  the  most  tedious 
part  of  ladies'  hairdressing,  and  the  prices  for  this 
work  are  according  to  the  amount  of  material  you 
have  used  and  the  work  you  have  done. 

In  using  other  dyes  such  as  Buckingham's  and  all 
brands  that  use  only  the  one  ingredient,  apply  it  the 
same  as  No.  1  in  the  former  explanation. 

There  are  other  dyes  that  are  to  be  applied  with  a 
fine  comb.  As  directions  are  g^iven  with  all  dyes  to 
be  used,  it  is  only  necessary  to  follow  direetions  in 
applying  it.  Different  formulas  for  dyes  are  given  in 
the  back  of  the  book,  and  can  be  obtained  at  any  drug 
store. 

Hair  can  be  crimped  and  dressed  as  soon  as  the 
dye  is  thoroughly  dried,  but  twenty-four  hours  after 
it  is  applied,  it  must  be  shampooed  as  some  kinds  of 
dye  leave  the  hair  sticky. 

In  shampooing  it  do  hot  use  shampoo  paste  or 
strong  soap.  First  prepare  a  suds  with  warm  water 
and  some  mild  brand  of  soap.  Take  the  customer  to 
the  wash  stand  and  have  the  suds  poured  over  the 
head  and  rubbed  lightly  before  using  the  spray  in 
order  to  remove  the  superfluous  dye  from  the  hair. 


5S  HAIKDRESSEKS'  MANUAL. 

SCALP  MASSAGE. 

Finger  Manipulation,  Vibratory  and  Electric. 

Scalp  Massage  is  a  part  of  hairdressing  and  taught 
in  the  same  course.  It  is  a  treatment  for  diseased  or 
unhealthy  scalp,  as  well  as  to  prevent  falling  hair, 
dandruff  and  other  diseases. 

The  unhealthy  scalp,  as  a  rule,  has  poor  circulation 
and  has  usually  grown  tight  to  the  head.  Finger  Manip- 
ulation is  for  the  purpose  of  loosening  and  creating  a  cir- 
culation, and  is  assisted  by  vibratory  or  electric  bat- 
tery. 

Tonics  are  essential  as  well  as  massage  in  this  work, 
and  the  formulas  on  the  following  pages  are  the  best 
we  have  found  for  this  purpose.  There  is  no  positive 
cure  for  bald  head,  but  they  have  some  time  been 
benefited  by  massage,  which  should  be  given  imme- 
diately after  the   shampoo. 

THE  FIRST  WORK. 
Part  the  hair  from  front  to  back,  beginning 
at  the  top,  apply  the  tonic  with  a  small  sponge 
or  small  bits  of  cotton,  soaked  in  the  tonic,  so 
that  it  will  thoroughly  moisten  the  scalp.  In  case 
you  use  the  sponge,  thoroughly  cleanse  it  after  using 
it  on  each  customer,  by  rinsing  it  in  10  per  cent,  solu- 
tion carbolic  acid  or  formalin. 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  59 

Pour  the  tonic  in  a  saucer  or  similar  receptacle,  take 
the  sponge  or  cotton  in  right  hand,  steady  the  head 
with  the  left  hand,  apply  the  tonic  to  scalp  where  the 
hair  is  parted.  Continue  by  parting  the  hair  about 
one  inch  below  the  first  part,  starting  on  the  right  side, 
working  clear  around  the  head  to  the  left.  Each  part 
should  be  about  one  inch  below  the  previous  one.  The 
object  being  to  apply  the  tonic  only  to  the  roots  and 
not  to  the  hair  itself. 

After  the  scalp  is  well  saturated,  begin  the  massage 
with  the  shuttle  movement.  Massage  with  balls  of 
the  fingers,  and  not  with  the  finger  nails.  The  object 
is  to  loosen  the  scalp  by  moving  the  fingers  back  and 
forth,  allowing  the  movement  of  one  hand  to  work 
opposite  to  the  other.  Continue  by  working  up  to 
the  top  of  the  scalp,  always  standing  behind  the  cus- 
tomer. 

The  next  movement  is  to  place  the  balls  of  the 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  on  top  of  the  scalp,  and  with 
the  right  manipulate  from  back  of  neck  to  crown, 
keeping  the  fingers  about  one  inch  apart.  Press  firmly, 
so  that  the  fingers  will  have  the  tendency  to  loosen  the 
scalp  without  pulling  the  hair.  After  treating  the 
entire  scalp  in  this  manner  continue  with  the  hands,  as 
fivsf  described,  using  a  rotary  movement. 


60 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


In  case  the  tonic  is  not  to  be  used,  proceed  with 
massage  movements  as  directed.  The  vibrator  massage 
can  be  used  in  place  of  finger  manipulation,  or  in 
addition  to  finger  manipulation,  as  follows: 


VIBRATORY  MASSAGE. 
The  Vibratory  Massage  is  not  an  electric  appliance,  as 
is  generally  supposed.  The  movement  of  the  apparatus 
is  attained  by  use  of  electric  motor,  but  no  electricity 
is  applied  to  the  scalp.  The  movement  is  a  short 
vibrating  action  so  rapid  that  in  itself  it  is  a  pleasant 
sensation    and    leaves    a    very    pleasant    feeling    to    the 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  61 

scalp.     This  apparatus  can  only  be  used  where  electric 
or  water  power  is   obtainable. 

The  ordinary  flexible  shaft  vibrators  cannot  be  used 
to  advantage  in  scalp  massage,  where  the  hair  is  long, 
as  the  rapidly  moving  mechanism  is  liable  to  get  fast 
in  the  hair,  but  the  vibrator  used  by  our  system  gives 
a  natural  vibratory  hand  massage  and  is  applied  by 
attaching  the  hand  to  instrument  in  place  of  rubber 
cup.  Instructions  for  operating  the  apparatus  are 
shown  in  the  following  pages. 

After  the  right  hand  has  been  attached  to  the  in- 
strument and  thrown  in  motion,  steady  the  head  by 
placing  the  left  hand  on  top  of  the  scalp,  and  with 
the  right  hand  in  motion  from  the  vibration  of  ma- 
chine place  the  tips  of  fingers  on  the  scalp  firmly  enough 
to  keep  them  from  tapping,  work  from  bottom  up,  con- 
tinuing clear  arourd  the  head.  This  is  especially  good 
for  headaches,  neuralgia  and  like  ailments.  More  work 
can  be  accomplished  in  one  minute  with  the  vibrator 
than  in  twenty  minutes  with  ordinary  finger  manipula- 
tion. Never  give  more  than  five  minutes  of  this 
treatment  at  one  time,  but  it  should  be  given  at  least 
once  a  week  to  keep  the  scalp  stimulated  and  in  a 
healthy    condition. 


62 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


ELECTRIC  SCALP  MASSAGE. 
In  many  cases  electric  treatment  for  the  scalp  is  pre- 
ferred to  other  methods,  and  it  may  be  given,  in  addi- 
tion to  finger  manipulation.  The  faradic  current  is 
used  for  this  purpose.  Full  instructions  for  the  use 
of  this   battery   is   given  on  the   following  pages. 


There  are  different  ways  of  applying  electricity  to 
the  scalp.  Allow  your  customer  to  choose  the  method 
preferred,  but  if  the  operator  is  allowed  to  use  her 
method,  select  the  most  beneficial  for  the  case.  If  to 
be  used  in  connection  with  the  finger  manipulation    first 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  63 

attach  the  wrist  electrode  to  wrist  of  right  arm,  have 
the  customer  hold  the  metallic  handle  attached  to  the 
battery,  proceed  as  in  the  first  instruction  in  finger 
manipulation.  This  applies  a  mild,  soothing  current 
through  the  operator.  The  connection  is  only  formed 
while  the  fingers  are  on  the  scalp. 

If  brush  is  preferred  in  place  of  wrist  electrode,  the 
brush  instead  of  wrist  band  is  attached  to  the  cord, 
and  the  hair  thoroughly  brushed,  being  careful  to  keep 
to  the  roots  of  the  hair.  The  brush  should  follow  the 
finger  manipulations. 


64  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


SHAMPOO  LIQUID. 

Bay  rum 3.qts. 

Tr.  Cantharides Yz  oz. 

Carbonated  amtnonia Yz  02. 

Sal  Tartar 1  oz. 

After  using,  cleanse  the  hair  with  clear  water. 

IDEAL  HAIR  DRiiSSING. 

Lanoline 4  ozs. 

Rosewater 1  oz. 

Lard,  prep 1  oz. 

Oil  rose 10  drops. 

•  HAIR  DYE. 
NO.  1. 

Gallic  acid 20  grs. 

Alcohol 5  drs. 

Water 2  drs. 

NO.  2. 

Silyer  nitrate 1  dr. 

Ammonia 3  drs. 

Gum  arable 30  drs. 

Water 6  drs. 

Dissolve  the  silver  nitrate  in  the  ammonia  and  the 
gum  arabic  in  the  water,  then  mix. 


HAIR    BIvEACH. 

Peroxide  of  Hydrogen  can  be  secured  at  any  drug 

store , 

HAIR  DYE. 
Nitrate  of  silver 20  grs. 

Sulphite  of  copper 2  grs. 

Ammonia Q.  S. 

Distilled  Water ■ Q.  S. 

Dissolve  the  salts  in  ^  oz.  water  and  add  ammonia 
until  the  precipitate  which  is  formed  is  redissolyed. 
Then  make  up  to  1  oz.  with  water.  Apply  to  the  hair 
with  old  tooth  or  nail  brush.  This  solution  slowly 
gives  a  brown  shade.  For  darker  shades  apply  a 
second  solution  composed  of — 

Yellow  sulphide  ammonia 2  drs. 

Solution  of  ammonia 1  dr. 

Distilled  water 1  oz. 

COLD  CREAM. 

Vaseline 14  ozs. 

Paraffin 1  oz. 

Eanoline 4  ozs. 

Water 6  ozs. 

Attar   of  Roses 5  drops. 

Vanilin 4  grs. 

Rect.   spirits 2  drs. 

MOLER  HAIR  TONIC. 

Bay  Rum    1  qt. 

Witch  Hazel 1  qt. 

Glycerine    4  oz. 

Tr.   Cantharides    1  oz. 

Ammonia     14  oz. 

Rose  Water    1  pt. 


66  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

PRICES  FOR  HAIRDRESSING. 

The  average  prices  for  hairdressing  in  iirst-class 
establishments  range  about  as  follows,  although  the 
price  is  usually  double  where  the  hairdresser  makes 
priyate  calls: 

Hairdressing,  plain $    50 

Hairdressing,  fancy 75c  to  1  00 

Trimming  top  bangs 15 

Trimming  top  and  side  bangs 25 

Trimming  and  curling  top  bangs 25 

Trimming  and  curling  top  and  side  bangs  35 

Shampooing,  medium  length 50 

Shampooing,  heavy  hair 75c  to  1  00 

Shampooing'  short  hair 25 

Trimming  short  hair  all  over 25 

Trimming  and  curling  short  hair  all  over  50 

Singeing  short  hair  all  over 25 

Singeing  long  hair 50 

Bleaching  medium  length,each  application  50 

Bleaching  long  hair,  each  application.  ....  1  00 

Dyeing  short  hair  all  over 2  00 

Dyeing  medium  length 5  00 

Dyeing  long  hair $  5  00  to  10  00 

Dyeing  heavy  gray  hair ^10  00  to  15  00 

Scalp  massage    50 

Scalp  massage,  electric   75 

Scalp   massage,   vibratory    1  00 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

HAIR  WORK. 
Hair  work  is  the  art  of  making  hairgoods,  switches, 
etc.  It  is  not  really  a  part  of  the  hairdressing,  but  is 
very  essential  in  connection  with  this  work.  Few 
hairdressing  parlors  are  established  without  this  one 
important  branch.  The  work  can  usually  be  done  during 
the  hours  one  is  not  steadily  engaged  at  the  hairdress- 
ing chair,  and  is  one  that  yields  a  good  profit.  In 
the  pages  following,  will  be  shown  the  instruments  neces- 
sary for  doing  the  work,  and  a  complete  course  of  in- 
structions on  the  manufacturing  of  everything  in  the 
hairgoods  line,  except  wigs,  which  is  a  separate  trade 
in  itself,  and  in  taking  up  hairwork  it  is  not  neces- 
sary. 

In  nearly  every  hairdressing  parlor  ladies  bring  their 
combings  to  be  made  into  switches,  bangs,  pompadour 
rolls  and  other  articles  of  false  hair.  Orders  for  these 
goods  can  be  sent  to  the  wholesale  house,  to  be  made 
up  at  fairly  good  profit,  but  by  being  able  to  do  this 
work  one  can  utilize  time  that  would  otherwise  be 
wasted. 

SELECTION  AND  CARE  OF  TOOLS. 
The  hackle  is   the   first   instrument   used,   and  is   for 
the  purpose  of  straightening  tangled  hair,  or  combings. 
It  is   made   in  two   sizes.   No.    i    and   No.    2.     In   large 


68 


HAiRDRESSERS*  MANUAL. 


establishments,    where   a   great   deal    of    work    is   being 
done,  No.  2  would  be  the  best  size  to  select. 

The  hackle  is  fastened  to  work  stands  or  table  by 
means  of  screws  at  each  end,  and  should  be  so  fastened 
that  it  can  be  easily  taken  off  to  be  cleaned,  as  in  the 
work  of  straightening  the  hair  it  becomes  filled  with 
dust  and  short  hairs. 


The  short  tufts  of  hair  that  become  tangled  in  the 
teeth  should  be  picked  out  with  a  hairpin  or  any  smalJ 
instrument  that  will  work  well  through  the  teeth,  and 
after  removing  it  from  the  work  stand  can  be  thor 
oughly  scrubbed.  There  is  no  difference  in  length  of 
teeth  or  distance  apart  in  the  two  sizes.  The  dif- 
ference is  in  the  number  of  teeth  each  contains. 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  69 

THE  NEEDLE  ROOTER. 
The  needle  rooter  is  for  the  purpose  of  separating 
the  long  hair  from  the  short  after  it  has  been  straight- 
ened in  the  hackle.  It  comes  in  two  sizes,  of  one  and 
two  rows  of  needles.  The  double  row  is  best  for  estab- 
lishments and  for  knitting,  but  the  smaller  one  will 
answer  the  purpose  for  ordinary  use.  It  is  also  fastened 
to  table  or  work  stand  by  screws  and  can  be  cleaned  in 
the  same  manner,  as  the  hackle,  although  it  will  not 
need  it  as  frequently,  as  the  hair  is  in  better  condition 
when    it    is    ready    for   this    instrument. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  rooter  is  for  the. 
purpose  of  arranging  the  roots  of  the  hair  all  at  the 
one  end,  but  this  is  impossible  in  working  with  comb- 
ings, but  it  must  be  used  to  arrange  the  ends  of  the 
hair  evenly. 

WEAVING  CARD. 

Weaving  cards  come  in  pairs  of  the  same  size  and 
arranged  with  teeth  of  wires  very  short  and  closely 
woven  together,  and  are  used  by  the  operator  for  keep- 
ing the  hair  straight  while  manufacturing.  In  weav- 
ing it  will  be  pulled  from  between  the  cards  as  it  is 
needed,  the  remainder  being  kept  intact  by  the  short 
wires  or   teeth. 


70 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


The  teeth  are  all  bent  in  one  direction,  and  the  hair 
to  be  pulled  in  opposite  direction;  this  prevents  it 
from  tangling  between  the  cards.  It  is  used  in  weav- 
ing, ventilating  or  in  manufacture  of  all  hair  goods. 
These  can  be  kept  clean  by  combing  out  with  the  ordi- 


nary comb,  lliis  will  be  necessar3%  as  frequently  as  the 
shade  of  hair  is  changed.  The  foundation  or  card  in 
itself  is  of  heavy  leather,  in  which  the  teeth  are  in- 
serted and  fastened. 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 


71 


WEAVING  STICKS. 

The  weaving  sticks,  or  looms,  are  so  made  that  they 
may  be  fastened  to  a  table  or  stand,  by  wooden  set 
screws,  and  are  easily  detached  or  adjusted.  If  fastened 
to  the  table  it  must  be  of  sufficient  length  to  allow  the 
operator  to  weave  on  the  threads  that  run  from  one 
to  the  other. 

Weaving  sticks  are  made  both  of  metal  and  wood 
and  others  are  made  of  part  metal  and  part  wood. 
The  latest  kind  is  that  on  wKich  the  spools  of  thread 
are  fastened  with  thumb  screw,  saving  the  trouble  of 
rewinding  the  thread  on  the  spool,  as  is  necessary 
with  the  old-style  weaving  loom.  Another  advantage  in 
this  kind  of  loom  is  that  they  never  slip  or  loosen  the 
thread,  as  does  the  old  style.  The  wooden  looms  should 
be  kept  in  a  dry  place,  so  that  the  dampness  cannot 
affect  them  and  render  them  useless  after  having 
dried  out.     No  care  will  be  necessary  otherwise. 


NEEDLE   CARD. 


72  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

Needle  cards  are  not  an  actual  necessity.  They  are 
only  used  to  keep  the  hair  straight.  They  are  made 
only  in  one  size  and  consist  of  two  parts;  the  lower 
part,  in  which  the  hair  is  laid,  is  similar  to  the  hackle, 
inasmuch  as  the  appearance  of  needles  are  concerned. 
The  upper  part  is  to  be  placed  over  lower  to  hold  the 
hair   in  place. 


MOUNTING  MACHTST:. 
The  mounting  machine  is  for  mounting  "switches  and 

curls.     It   is   to   be   attached  to  a   table  by  means  of  a 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


•3 


thumb  screw.  It  is  easily  taken  off  and  aduated.  Turn- 
ing the  crank,  the  cord  is  made  to  revolve  as  the 
switch  is  mounted.  It  is  made  entirely  of  iron  and 
needs  no  care  except  that  it  should  be  kept  free  from 
rust  and  oiled  as  often  as  required. 


THE  VENTILATING  BLOCK. 
The  Ventilating  Block,  or  wig  block,  is  made  of  wood. 
in  the  shape  of  the  skull.  It  is  an  article  on  which  the 
ventilating  net  is  attached.  It  is  also  used  for  dress- 
ing wigs  to  illustrate  fancy  styles.  The  more  ex- 
pensive blocks  are  hard  wood,  and  should  be  well  sea- 
soned to  prevent  splitting.  The  less  expensive  ones  are 
softer  material  and  will  answer  the  purpose  for  ordi- 
nary use.  There  are  also  some  made  of  papier  mache. 
porcelain  and  glass,  but  the  wood  are  the  only  suitable 
ones   for   ventilating. 


74 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


ADJUSTABLE  BLOQv  HOLDER. 
The  Block  Holder  is  the  instrument  to  which  the 
block  should  be  attached  in  ventilating.  It  is  not  as 
essential  as  some  of  the  other  instruments  in  manufac- 
ture of  hair  goods,  as  the  block  can  be  held  in  the  lap, 
but  will  be  found  a  great  convenience.  It  is  so  con- 
structed that  the  mounted  block  can  be  adjusted  to  any 
position.  It  is  made  entirely  of  iron  and  very  durable.^ 
It  can  be  fastened  to  table  or  stand  same  as  mounting 
machine. 


KAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


PRESSING   IRON. 

A  pressing  iron  is  a  very  convenient  instrument  to 
have  for  the  purpose  of  pressing  switches,  but  is  not 
considered  a  necessity.  This  completes  the  outfit.  Any 
of  these  instruments  can  be  had  at  the  Moler  Supply 
Houfe,   39   Peck  Court,   Chicago,   111. 

MANUFACTURING    SWITCHES. 

First  Work:  Hackling  Combings. 
If  the  switch  is  to  be  made  of  combings,  the  hair 
must  be  first  picked  apart  in  order  to  prepare  it  for 
the  hackle,  as  it  cannot  be  hackled  in  the  condition 
combings  are  usually  delivered  to  the  hairdresser.  This 
is  essential,  as  the  hair  would  be  broken  in  short  ends 
if  it  were  to  be  hackled  without  first  being  picked  apart 
in  a  loose  condition.  After  the  hair  has  all  been  picked 
apart,  take  a  small  amount  in  the  hands  and  draw  it 
out  to  the  ends  of  the  hair  to  get  it  as  straight 
as   possible.     Take   a   small   quantity   at  a   time. 

The  hair  at  first  must  T)e  arawn  lightly  over  the 
hackle,  not  allowing  it  to  take  up  more  than  one- 
third    of    the    length    of    the    teeth.      If    it    were    to    be 


76 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


drawn  entirely  through  the  hackle,  it  would  require  so 
much  force  that  the  hair  would  be  broken  into  short 
lengths.  After  you  have  the  hair  straightened  as  much 
as  possible,  place  it  in  the  rooter,  to  be  held  for  fur- 
ther treatment.  Continue  until  you  have  the  desireri 
amount   straightened. 

Remove  all  of  the  hair  from  the  rooter  in  a  body  and 
draw  it  through  the  hackle  again,  being  very  careful 
to  hold  the  ends  tightly  to  prevent  part  of  it  draw- 
ing out  of  the  hands  and  tangling  in  the  teeth  of  the 
hackle.  Draw  through  as  many  times  as  necessary 
to  have  it  perfectly  straight.  Now  you  have  the  hail 
prepared  for  the  rooter.  Take  about  half  the  amount 
of  hair  necessary  for  the  ordinary  switch   (bdng  care- 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  77 

ful  not  to  tangle  the  hair);  hold  it  in  the  left  hand  at 
about  the  center  of  the  strand,  and  with  the  right 
hand,  place  the  longer  ends  in  the  rooter  and  draw  the 
strands  of  shorter  hair  from  the  longer  ones.  Continue 
in  this  manner,  changing  ends  with  the  strand  until 
you  have  all  of  the  longer  ones  separated  from  the 
short.  Remove  the  strands  you  have  in  the  rooter  to 
keep  them  separate  from  the  short  lengths,  as  this 
will  be  necessary  for  the  outer  covering  of  the  switch. 
It  will  not  be  necessary  to  root  the  balance  of  tlie 
strand,  as  after  the  longer  ones  are  separated,  th3 
shorter  ones  will  be  even  enough  for  use.  In  the  ordi- 
nary combings,  there  will  be  about  one-eighth  of  the 
entire  amount,  long  hair.  This  is  to  be  placed  in  thg 
weaving  cards,  separate  from  the  shorter  lengths,  and  is 
to  be  woven  first  in  the  outer  strands  with  one-third 
of  the  amount  of  short  hair  that  you  have  for  the 
entire  switch.  The  remainder  of  the  hair  is  to  be 
placed  in  the  needle  cards  to  be  kept  straight  while 
manufacturing  the   first  strand. 

Place  the  weaving  sticks  about  a  yard  apart  on  a 
table  of  convenient  height,  or  work  stand  for  the  pur- 
pose. Three  spools  of  thread  will  be  required  on  the 
holders   intended   for  them   on   the    loom    at    the   right. 

Take  the  three  ends  from  the  spools,  unwind  them 
to  a  sufficient  length  to  reach  the  weaving  stick  on  the 


78  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

other  side,  being  careful  not  to  twist  or  tangle  the 
threads.  Tie  the  three  ends  together  and  attach  them 
to  the  weaving  stick  at  the  left,  so  that  they  can  be 
drawn  tight.  Tighten  each  one  separately  by  turning 
the  spool  and  fasten  the  same  with  the  thumb  screw 
for  this  purpose.  Now,  thoroughly  wax  your  threads 
with  ordinary  beeswax  and  rub  them  well  with  a 
cloth.  This  is  to  strengthen  the  threads  and  enable  the 
hair  to  slip  to  its  place  at  the  end  of  the  strand. 

Weaving. 
Now  you  are  ready  for  weaving.  Beginning  with  the 
long  hair,  pull  a  small  strand  from  the  weaving  cards, 
taking  those  from  the  very  ends.  Take  an  amount,  that 
if  rolled  tightly  would  be  about  the  size  of  a  No.  20 
thread.  This  is  for  the  covering  of  the  first  strand. 
The  covering  is  Avoven  in  a  double  weft.  In  drawing 
the  strand  from  the  weaving  cards,  draw  it  part  way 
out  with  the  thumb  and  finger  of  the  right  hand,  wind 
the  strand  around  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand, 
leaving  about  two  inches  of  the  end  protruding.  Be  care- 
ful to  hold  the  strand  tightly  with  the  third  and  lit- 
tle finger,  and  with  the  finger  and  thumb.  Begin  by 
holding  the  strand  with  the  thumb  and  finger  back  of 
the  lower  thread,  drawing  the  top  of  the  strand  through 
with  the  thumb  and  the  finger  of  the  right  hand,  roll 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  79 

ing  the  strand  as  it  is  drawn  in  place,  keeping  the  hair 
together.  Bring  it  over  the  two  threads  and  with  tlie 
thumb  and  finger  of  the  left  hand,  hold  it  in  place  and 
draw  it  through  between  the  top  and  second  thread. 
Now,  bring  the  ends  under  the  three  threads  with  tne 
thumb  and  finger  of  the  right  hand,  hold  it  in  place 
with  the  finger  of  the  left  hand,  draw  it  between  the 
top  and  center  thread,  carry  it  over  the  top  thread  with 
the  thumb  and  finger  of  the  right  hand.  Push  the 
strand  between  the  top  and  center  thread  with  the 
finger  of  the  left  hand,  grasp  it  with  the  thumb  and 
finger  of  the  right  hand  and  carry  it  underneath  the 
lower  thread  and  carry  back  between  the  top  and 
center  thread  with  the  finger  of  the  left  hand.  Grasp 
the  strand  again  with  the  thumb  and  finger  of  the 
right  hand,  carry  it  over  the  thread,  push  it  between 
the  top  and  center  thread  with  the  finger  of  the  left 
hand.  Grasp  it  again  with  the  thumb  and  finger  of 
the  right  hand.  Finish  it  up  by  pulling  it  between 
the  center  and  lower  thread  with  the  thumb  and  finger 
of  the  right  hand.  Pull  the  strand  doAvn  with  the 
thumb  and  finger  of  the  left  hand  to  within  about  a 
half-inch  of  the  end  of  the  strand.  Take  the  short  end 
between  the  thumb  and  finger  of  the  right  hand,  allow- 
ing the  longer  end  of  the  strand  to  pull  down  tightly 
over  the  first  finger  of  the  right  hand,  twisting  in  such 


80  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

a  way  that  the  short  ends  will  all  fall  on  the  side  of 
the  weft  toward  you.  This  is  the  improved  French 
double  weft.  The  double  weft  is  to  be  woven  only 
about  three  inches,  a  sufficient  length  for  the  covering. 
The  single  weft  is  the  same  as  the  double  with  the  ex- 
ception that  the  last  stitch  is  omitted,  and  can  be 
woven  in  larger  strands,  taking  nearly  twice  the  amount 
of  hair  for  each  strand. 

Finish  weaving  the  amount  of  short  hair  that  you 
have  in  the  cards  on  this  strand.  Having  finished  the 
strand,  tie  the  end  by  weaving  a  thread  at  the  end  in 
the  same  manner  that  the  hair  is  woven.  This  thread 
is  woven  in  for  the  purpose  of  keeping  the  strands 
apart.  Wind  the  amount  already  woven  around  the 
weaving  stick  at  the  left  by  loosening  the  spools  on 
the  stick  at  the  right,  tightening  them  again  when  th- 
woven  strand  is  wound  in  place. 

Begin  the  second  strand  with  a  thread  woven  th 
same  as  you  finished  the  first  one,  starting  about  fou 
inches  from  the  one  just  completed. 

You  now  have  two-thirds  of  the  short  hair  left  in 
the  needle  cards.  Divide  this  in  two  equal  parts,  place 
in  the  weaving  cards  and  proceed  as  before,  making  two 
more  strands.  These  are  to  be  woven  single  weft. 
^ATien  the  three  strands  are  completed,  cut  them  apart, 
take  off  the  end  threads  that  have  been  woven  in  place 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 


81 


ot  the  hair,  tie  the  end  of  your  threads  in  an  ordinary 
hard  knot,  leaving  the  three  strands  ready  for  mount- 
ing. If  cut  hair,  or  hair  boughten  for  the  purpose,  is 
used  instead  of  combings,  weave  in  the  same  manner, 
but  it  will  not  require  hackling,  and  the  strands  can  be 
woven  shorter,  as  the  stem  is  made  shorter  in  mount- 
ing. 


MOUNTING. 
First   wind   the   mounting   cord   on   the   spool   of    the 
mounting   machine,  the   same    as   winding  thread   on   a 


82  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

spool.  Fill  it  by  holding  the  cord  and  turning  the 
machine  backward,  or  in  the  opposite  direction  from 
the  way  it  should  turn  while  mounting. 

Wind  on  the  spool  a  sufficient  amount  for  your 
switch,  which  should  be  about  a  yard.  Begin  by  sewing 
the  mounting  cord  at  the  end  of  one  of  the  shorter 
strands  by  holding  the  hair  in  the  left  hand  with  the 
inner  part  of  the  strand  toward  you.  This  would  be 
the  part  where  the  short  ends  protrude  at  the  top  of 
the  strand.  It  should  be  sewed  on  with  the  ordinary 
sewing  silk,  which  should  be  as  near  the  shade  of  the 
hair  as  possible.  You  must  sew  it  especially  strong 
as  this  is  the  only  place  the  mounting  cord  is  sewed  to 
the  switch  except  at  the  top. 

Wind  the  mounting  cord  over  the  hook  at  the  end 
of  the  spool  about  six  times  to  keep  it  from  slipping 
on  the  machine.  Begin  by  turning  the  crank  of  the 
mounting  machine,  which  will  twist  the  cord,  and  roll 
the  strand. '  Hold  the  strand  of  hair  in  the  hand  in 
such  a  manner  that  in  rolling  in  a  spiral  up  the  cord 
and  not  straight  around.  This  leaves  the  lower  part, 
or  part  to  which  the  cord  was  originally  attached,  in 
the  center  of  the  switch.  It  must  be  made  thin  and 
pliable.  Sew  the  top  end  of  the  strand  to  the  cord. 
Cut  the  strand  from  the  mounting  machine  about  one 
inch  from  the  top  of  the  hair.     The  first  strand  is  now 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL.  83 

completed.  Proceed  with  the  next  short  strand  in  the 
same  way,  and  the  third  one  in  the  same  manner  to 
within  about  three  inches  of  the  end,  then  sew  the 
cord  securely  to  the  weft.  Now,  if  there  is  any  dif- 
ference in  the  length  of  the  two  short  ones,  take  the 
shortest,  sew  it  on  at  the  point  where  you  have  fastened 
the  cord  to  the  weft  for  the  outer  strand.  Turn  the 
outer  strand  around  the  one  you  have  just  completed. 
Fasten  the  third  and  last  strand  on  the  opposite  side, 
sewing  the  three  securely  together.  Trim  oflF  the  short 
ends  of  mounting  cord  that  you  have  left  in  detaching 
the  strands  from  the  mounting  machine.  You  now 
wijid  the  silk  thread  around  the  mounting  cord  attached 
to  the  switch  covering  about  an  inch  and  a  half,  wind- 
ing it  close  enough  so  that  only  the  silk  thread  is 
visible.  Cut  ofT  the  mounting  cord  about  a  half-inch 
from  the  end  of  the  covered  portion,  bring  the  end  down 
and  make  a  loop  by  sewing  the  other  end  to  the  weft. 
This  is  called,  covering  and  making  the  loop.  Now,  wind 
the  balance  of  the  weft  around  the  point  where  you 
have  made  the  loop,  and  sew  in  place  as  you  pro- 
ceed. WTien  you  have  reached  the  end,  sew  it  securely 
in  place  and  cut  off  the  knot  that  has  been  made  at 
the  end  of  the  strand.  A  pinching  iron^  is  best  for  mak- 
ins:  the   top   at  the   loop   perfectly    smooth,    but   if  you 


84  HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 

have  none  for  this  purpose,  press  it  as  smooth  as  pos- 
sible with  any  other  convenient  instrument. 

Now,  wind  your  thread  around  the  top  from  the 
loop  down  an  eighth  of  an  inch.  Fasten  the  end  of 
the  thread  in  place  by  stitching  through  the  top  of 
the  switch  and  back  through  the  loop.  Several  stitches 
of  this  kind  will  be  necessary  in  order  to  keep  the 
thread  from  slipping  over  the  loop.  This  completes  the 
switch. 

This  is  the  usual  way  of  making  switches,  but  there 
are  variations  that  can  be  followed.  One  is  the  stem- 
less  switcli.  made  by  weaving  in  two  strands  mounted 
by  folding  the  weft  in  folds  of  about  two  inches  in 
length,  and  the  two  strands  sewed  together  in  the  cen- 
ter. Another  style  of  mounting  is  by  ^king  a  clock 
spring,  that  can  be  had  at  any  jewelry  store,  cut  it 
about  nine  inches  long,  straighten  it  out  and  cover  it 
with  wig  riV)bon.  Form  in  a  circle  and  sew  the  weft 
to  the  spring.  This  style  of  switch  is  used  to  best 
advantage  where  oue  has  but  little  hair,  the  hair 
being  made  into  a  knot  at  the  top  of  the  head  and  the 
circle  placed  over  it. 

VENTILATING. 
The  articles  necessary  for  this  purpose  is  the  ventilat- 
ing net,  ventilating  needle  and  a  wig  block.     Tack  the 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 


85 


ventilating  net  to  the  top  of  the  wig  block  and  if  you 
have  the  adjustable  block  holder,  place  it  in  a  con- 
venient position  to  be  worked  upon.  Steel  points,  made 
for  this  purpose,  should  be  used  in  fastening  the  net  to 
the  block.  You  should  not  ventilate  combings,  always 
using  cut  hair.  Take  a  small  strand  of  hair  betweeen 
the  finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  with  ventilating 
needle  in  the  right  hand.  Twist  the  strand  at  the  end 
and  form  in  a  loop  held  in  the  loft  hand.  Begin  at  the 
end,  always  working  lengthwise  of  the  net.  The  ven- 
tilating needle  is  curved  and  by  running  it  through  the 
lace,  it  will  protrude  in  the  next  hole  from  the  en- 
trance.     Kook   the    loop   of   the    strand   into   the   needle, 


86  HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL. 

which  has  a  hook  at  the  end,  drawing  the  hair  through 
the  net  to  the  right  and  avoid  letting  it  slip  from 
the  needle.  Now,  bring  the  needle  under  the  strand 
of  hair,  holding  between  the  thumb  and  finger  of  the 
left  hand,  drawing  partly  through,  and  pull  through  the 
loop  now^  formed.  Draw  it  tightly  in  the  net.  If  ven- 
tilating for  fine  work  use  each  hole  in  the  net,  but 
ordinarily  you  would  use  every  second  one.  In  ventilat- 
ing pompadours,  it  is  customary  to  ventilate  about 
three  rows^  and  the  foundation  should  be  from  10  to  12 
inches  long.  You  proceed  in  the  same  manner  to  ven- 
tilate Toupees,  front  pieces  and  bangs.  In  making 
a  part  for  the  front  piece,  begin  in  the  center,  marked 
with  straight  line  underneath  the  net  to  be  guided  by. 
Ventilate  one  side  from  you,  tmn  the  work  around  and 
ventilate  the  other  side  in  the  same  way,  leaving  one 
row  of  holes  between,  if  you  want  a  wide  part,  such  as 
men's  toupees,  if  a  narrow^  part  is  desired,  ventilate  in 
all   the   holes. 

ARTIFICIAL  CURLS. 
Curls  are  woven  the  same  as  the  switch  and  mounted 
the  same,  except  that  there  is  but  one  strand  and  no 
stem.  They  can  be  made  of  short  hair  for  curls  around 
the  face,  or  of  long  hair  for  the  French  curl  at  the 
neck.     Montagues   are  made    by    fastening   a   strand   of 


HAIRDRESSERS'   MANUAL.  87 

hair  to  a  style  of  hairpin  for  this  purpose.  A  strand 
of  hair  woven  from  four  to  six  inches  long  and  made 
of    six-inch   hair. 

PUFFS. 

Puffs  are  usually  woven  about  nine  inches  long,  made 
out  of  ten-inch  hair.  They  can  be  mounted  on  millinery 
braid  and  sewed  back  and  forth,  making  them  about 
two  to  two  and  a  half  inches  long.  The  millinery  braid 
should  extend  about  one  and  a  half  inches  on  each 
side.  They  should  be  done  up  by  rolling  on  the  fingers, 
the  same  as  the  puff  described  in  Hairdressing,  then 
fold  the  extended  ends  of  the  millinery  braid  on  the 
inside  to  hold  the  puff  in  place. 

POMPADOURS. 

First  prepare  your  foundation  by  taking  a  strip  of 
ventilating  net  cut  about  an  inch  wide  at  each  end  and 
tapering  to  about  one  and  a  half  inches  in  the  center. 
It  should  be  about  twelve  "nches  long.  Prepare  it  by 
turning  the  upper  edge  a*icr  binding  it  with  binding 
ribbon  about  one-eighth  o*  an  inch,  leaving  about  an 
inch  of  the  ribbon  at  each  snd  to  finish  the  end  of  the 
lace  when  the  pompadour  ^w  completed.  Tack  the  net 
on  the  wig  block,  as  described  in  ventilating.  Ventilate 
lengthwise,  on  the  lower  slue,  about  four  rows,  within 
an  eight  of  an  inch  of  the  edge,  using  sixteen-inch  natu- 
ral wavy  hair. 


88  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

After  completing  the  ventilating,  remove  it  from  the 
block,  fold  the  lower  edge  of  the  lace  and  hem  in 
place.  Now,  lay  the  ventilated  piece  aside  and  weave 
two  strands,  as  described  in  weaving,  each  the  length 
of  the  ventilated  piece,  using  the  same  hair  and  of  the 
same  length.  Now,  sew  the  first  strand  on  back  of  the 
ventilated  hair,  opposite  to  the  side  on  which  the  rib- 
bon has  been  sewed,  and  place  the  other  strand  just 
above  the  first  and  sew  in  place.  Now,  finish  the  ends 
by  sewing  the  ribbon  in  place. 

There  are  also  less  expensive  pompadours,  made  by 
weaving  the  hair  in  two  or  three  sfrands  of  the  proper 
length  desired,  and  sewed  to  millinery  braid,  instead  of 
the  ventilated  piece.  In  the  center  of  the  strand  there 
should  be  sewed  an  additional  piece  of  millinery  braid 
about  five  inches  long,  sewed  at  each  end,  about  three 
inches  apart,  so  that  it  will  stand  up  when  it  is  put 
on  the  head.  A  strand  of  hair  of  the  same  length  should 
also  be  fastened  to  this  piece.  Another  style  is  made 
by  weaving  combings,  if  desired,  in  place  of  cut  hair, 
in  a  strand  of  the  proper  length,  weaving  the  top 
strand  of  wire  in  place  of  thread.  The  wire  must  be  of 
very  light  and  flexible  material,  and  of  the  kind  that 
will  be  durable.  It  should  be  woven  coarse,  and  if  it 
is    desired    heavy,    weave    an    extra    piece,    using    the 


HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL.  89 

three   threads   and  not  the  wire,  and  sew  the  two  to- 
gether. 

In  cutting  the  threads  from  the  loom,  proceed  the 
same  as  directions  in  weaving,  but  in  cutting  off  the 
wire  leave  about  an  inch  at  each  end,  so  that  it  can  be 
bent  in  a  loop.  Cover  with  thread,  the  same  as  in 
making  button  holes. 

DRESSING  POMPADOURS,  FRONT  PIECES,  ETC. 

The  method  of  water  waving  is  used  to  dress  bangs, 
pompadours,  front  pieces,  etc.  Only  natural  wavy  hair 
can  be  dressed  in  this  manner. 

Prepare  article  to  be  dressed  by  tacking  with  wig 
points  on  the  table  or  work  board,  for  this  purpose. 
To  half  a  pint  of  water,  take  three  tablespoonfuls  of 
Bandoline,  or  curling  fluid.  Dampen  the  hair  thoroughly 
with  this  solution.  Begin  at  the  top,  using  a  rubber 
comb  with  a  handle.  Take  the  hair  in  parts  about 
three  inches  wide,  each  part  being  combed  out  well 
and  begin  on  the  left  side.  Comb  down  about  an  inch, 
draw  to  the  right  and  crease  it.  Hold  this  in  place 
with  the  back  of  another  comb  or  with  the  left  hand, 
pushing  the  first  wave  up  ■  a  little,  then  comb  down 
about  another  inch,  draw  to  the  left  and  crease  it,  and 
continue  until  all  is  waved,  keeping  the  hair  quite  wet 
during  the  process.     The  waves  may  be  made  large  or 


90  HAIRDRESSERS'  MANUAL. 

small  as  desired.  For  pompadours  the  waves  are  made 
large.  Bangs  and  front  pieces  are  waved  smaller.  The 
article  should  be  left  on  the  board  twenty-four  hours,  or 
until  thoroughly  dried  before  removing.  In  case  you 
are  in  a  hurry  for  it,  it  can  be  ironed  dry  with  a  hot 
flatiron. 

Pompadours,  as  a  rule,  are  not  dressed  throughout  in 
this  manner.  The  ends  being  thoroughly  saturated  with 
water  to  take  out  the  kinky  effect  and  combing  the 
top  into  natural  waves  by  dipping  the  comb  into  the 
water  and  Bandoline  solution. 

Montagues,  or  short  curls,  for  the  front  of  the  face, 
should  be  dressed  by  winding  the  end  around  the  fore- 
finger of  the  left  hand.  Remove  from  the  finger  afteT' 
you  have  started  the  curl  and  finishing  by  rolling  it 
around  in  a  tight  ring  and  pin  with  a  common  pin. 
These  are  usually  dressed  on  a  wig  block,  covered  with 
paper.  The  same  preparation  being  used  as  above  de 
scribed,  and  after  thoroughly  drying,  may  be  combed 
out  or   left   rolled   as   preferred. 

BANDOLINE. 
Flaxseed,   1   oz.  '     Water,  1  pint. 

Boil  together  15  minutes    strain  and  add: 
Rosewater,  1  quart.  Gum  tragacanth,  1  oz. 

Let  stand  24  hours,  strain,  and  add  any  scent  desired. 


MANICURERS' MANUAL,  HI 


MANICURING. 


Manicuring-  is  the  art  of  treating^  the  fing-er  nails 
and  cuticle.  It  has  formerly  been  considered  a  part 
of  the  doctor's  profession,  but  recently  has  been 
taken  up  by  masseuse  and  hairdressers  and  is  rapidly 
becoming  more  popular.  The  demand  for  this  work 
can  better  be  illustrated  by  explaining  the  fact  that 
very  few  hairdressers  now-a-days  find  ready  employ- 
ment without  being  able  to  do  manicuring-.  The 
prices  for  this  work  are  much  better  than  most  any- 
thing else  in  the  line  of  trades  and  a  manicurer  finds 
employment  at  easier  work,  shorter  hours  and  better 
salary  than  most  any  work  that  a  man  or  woman  can 
engage  in. 

The  work  consists  of  trimming  and  shaping  the 
nails,  trimming  the  cuticle,  and  when  necessary  per- 
forming slight  operations  in  shaping  the  nail  or  do- 
ing away  with  hang  nails,  also  removing-  stains  and 
polishing. 

SEIvEiCTION  AND  CARE  OF  TOOLS. 

A  complete  outfit  of  tools  for  this  work  consists  of 
a  file,  scissors,  cuticle  knife,  buffer,  polisher,  orange 
sticks  and  emery  boards 


92  MANICURERS'    MANUAL 

FllvIiS. 

In  selecting  tools,  you  should  have  two  files,  one 
of  coarse  and  the  other  of  fine  grain.  The  kind  most 
used  is  a  thin  slim  file,  one  that  is  easy  to  handle 
and  can  be  got  under  the  edge  of  the  nail  nicely. 
Select  only  those  of  the  best  grade;   the  thinner  ones 


are  of  the  best  quality  but  are  much  easier  broken. 
Great  care  must  be  used  in  handling  these  tools, 
being  careful  not  to  drop  them  or  use  them  for  any 
other  work  except  filing  the  nails. 

SHEARS. 

In  selecting  scissors,  there  is  but  one  style  in  the 
regular  manicuring  shear,  but  they  are  of  dififerent 
grades.  Nothing  but  a  full  steel  shear  is  desirable, 
and  ayoid  gettirg  those  with  fancy  handles  as  they 
are  usually  made  Tor  private  use  instead  of  practical 
work  at  the  business. 


The  regular  manicuring  shear  has   curved    blades, 
and  no  other  shear  will  answer  the  purpose. 


MANICURERS'    MANUAL.  93 

The  cuticle  knife  is  one  with  a  very  short  blade, 
used  for  loosening-  the  cuticle,  taking"  off  hang-  nails 
and  cleaning  underneath  the  nail.     Select  the  ones 


that  are  the  thinnest  and  most  pointed  to  enable  you 
to  get  under  the  nail  without  loosening  the  flesh. 

The  buffer  is  used  for  rubbing  the  nail  after  the 
powder  is  applied.  It  is  for  the  purpose  of  putting  the 
nail  in  proper  condition  to  be  polished.  Do  not  try 
to  use  the  small  ones  ordinarily  used  in  private  use. 
Select  one  that  is  soft  and  pliable  and  one  about  four 
inches  long. 

The  polisher  is  similar  to  the  buffer  except  that  it  is 
longer  and  curved  more  giving  a  finer  polish  to  the 
nail.  In  selecting  look  to  those  that  are  soft  and 
thick. 

Orange  sticks  are  used  for  loosening  the  cuticle, 
applying  the  bleach  and  cleaning  under  the  nail.  They 
are  made  of  orange  wood  and  do  not  soak  soft  and 
swell  as  any  other  wood  does  when  kept  in  water. 
There  is  only  one  grade  and  size. 

The  emery  boards  are  used  for  smoothing  the  edge 
of  the  nail  after  the  file  has  been  used.  The  same  as 
the  orange  sticks  they  are  all  the  same  grade  and 
size,  each  one  having  a  coarse  and  fine  side,  the 
coarse  side  to  be  used  first  and  the  fine  last.     After 


94  MANICURERS'  MANUAL,. 

the  file  has  been  used,  rough  edges  always  appear  on 
the  nail,  and  the  emery  board  is  the  only  thing  that 
will  smooth  it  properly. 

Proper  tools  used  in  professional  work  can  only 
be  secured  at  the  wholesale  houses.  Do  not  select 
the  manicuring  outfits  that  are  on  sale  at  stationery 
stores  and  only  get  those  of  good,  quality.  Any 
wholesale  hair  goods  store  will  handle  them. 

Manicure  on  a  table  the  proper  height  to  be  con- 
venient for  you  to  work  upon  sitting  down.  Table 
should  be  narrow  so  that  the  customer  may  sit  close 
to  the  operator.  A  finger  bowl  and  nail  brush  are  ne- 
cessary, and  usually  small  cushions  are  used  for  the 
customers  to  rest  their  arms  upon. 

THE   FIRST  WORK. 

Seat  your  customer  opposite  you  at  the  table  begin- 
ning with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand.  If  the  nail  is 
very  long  it  is  better  to  use  a  small  pair  of  shears  (not 
the  manicuring  shears)  to  trim  it  to  a  convenient 
length  to  be  filed  in  proper  shape.  Hold  the  file  in 
the  right  hand  between  the  fingers  and  thumb,  as 
shown  in  the  illustration.  Begin  at  one  side  and 
file  the  nail  from  one  end  to  the  other.  As  the  file 
will  only  cut  one  way,  it  is  not  necessary  to  file  back 
and  forth.  Always  draw  the  file  in  the  direction  that 
it  cuts,  and  from  the  side  of  the  nail  to  the  center. 


o 

be 

c 


Emery  Board. 


Polisher. 


Buffer. 


96 


MANICURERS'     MANUAL 


When  one  side  is  filed  sufficiently  begin  on  the  oppo- 
site and  draw  the  file  toward  the  center  of  the  nail, 
as  in  filing:  backwards  it  gfiyes  the  fing-er  an  unpleas- 
ant sensation.  Always  consult  your  customer  as  to 
the    shape    they  prefer    their  nails;  often    you    are 


FILING. 

requested  to    file    them  pointed,   while   other  times 

rounding  them  to  a  graceful  curve. 
After  the  fingers  and   thumb   of   one   hand    haye 

been  filed  place  them  in  the  finger  bowl  with  warm 
oap  water,  allowing  them  to  soak  until  the  right 
land  has  been  filed.     After  completing  the  filing  of 

the  right  hand  take  the  left   hand  from  the  bowl  of 

water,  wipe  it  thoroughly  and  prepare  for  trimming- 

the  cuticle,  and   put   the  right  hand  in   the  bowl  ol 

water. 


MANICURERS'    MANUAL. 


97 


Take  the  orange  stick  in  the  rig^ht  hand,  dip  it  in 
the  bottle  of  Ongaline — which  is  for  the  purpose  of 
bleaching-  the  nail  and  removing  stains.  Hold  the 
left  as  shown  in  illustration,   loosen   the  cuticle  by 


USING  ORANGE  STICK. 

pushing  it  back  with  the  end  of  the  orange  stick  and 
gently  working  the  stick  underneath,  leaving  the  cut- 
icle free  from  the  nail.  Caution  should  be  displayed 
in  this  work  not  to  hurt   the  customer  or  mar  the 


98 


MANICURERS'  MANUAL. 


surface  of  the  nail.  After  the  cuticle  has  been  thor- 
cug-hly  loosened,  remove  all  the  black  stains  from 
underneath  the  nail  by  applying-  bleach  with  the 
orange  stick. 

When  hang-  nails  appear  loosen  them  as  much  as 
possible  with  the  cuticle  knife,  and  cut  them  out  as 


TRIMMING  CUTICI^E. 

close  to  the  roots  as  possible  with  the  shears.  If 
thoroug-hly  loosened  they  will  not  appear  again,  but 
if  only  partly  trimmed  off  they  continue  to  grow,  and 
are  annoying.  When  rough  edges  appear  above 
the  cuticle  they  should   be    trimmed    close  with  the 


MANICURERS'    MANUAL.  99 

shears;  apply  vaseline,  or  some  substance  that  will 
soften  and  avoid  further  breaking-  of  the  skin. 

Next  take  your  Manicuring-  shears  in  the  thumb 
and  second  fing-er  of  the  right  hand  and  trim  the 
loose  cuticle,  beginning  at  one  side  and  work  around 
the  nail,  being  careful  not  to  trim  in  far  enough  to 
make  the  cuticle  bleed,  also  hold  the  shears  in  such 
a  position  so  as  to  trim  underneath  and  not  at  the 
outer  edge  of  the  cuticle.  Begin  at  the  right  side 
and  work  clear  around,  holding  the  shears  in  the 
same  position.  Do  not  try  to  trim  one  side  and  then 
change  yoiir  shears  and  trim  the  other;  this  mistake 
is  often  made.  If  the  top  of  the  cuticle  is  trimmed 
and  not  the  under  part  it  will  allow  hang-  nail  to 
appear  in  a  short  time.     This  must  be  avoided. 

After  the  cuticle  has  been  trimmed  on  the  four  fin- 
gers and  thumb,  then  apply  the  rosaline  by  rubbing 
a  small  portion  on  the  nail  with  the  flng-er,  then  dip 
the  buffer  in  the  powder  and  polish  the  nail  by 
rubbing  back  and  forth  over  the  nail  until  it  has  a 
smooth,  g-lossy  surface.  The  rosaline  is  to  give  it  the 
proper  tint  and  assist  in  polishing,  and  the  powder 
is  to  dry  and  enamel  the  nail.  In  polishing-,  be  care- 
ful not  to  irritate  or  heat  the  nail,  as  the  friction  of 
the  polisher  soon  warms  or  burns,  making  it  very 
disagreeable  for  the  customer. 

Now,  take  the  rig-ht  hand  from  the  bowl,  wipe  it 


100  MANICURERS'  MANVAl, 

dry  and  clean,  loosen  the  cuticle  and  polish  the  same 
as  the  left. 

After  both  hands  have  been  polished  wash  the 
nails  of  the  left  hand  by  cleaning-  them  thoroughly 
with  the  nail  brush  to  remove  all  powder  and  rosa- 
line  from  the  nail  then  rinse  the  hands  in  clean, 
warm  water  and  wipe  dry.  After  both  hands  have 
been  treated  in  the  same  way,  use  the  cuticle  knife 
to  remove  stains  that  cannot  be  taken  out  with  the 
bleach  and  orange  stick  underneath  the  nail.  Treat 
both  hands  this  way  a"-^.  smooth  the  edg-e  of  the 
nail  with  the  emery  board,  using"  it  the  same  as  the 
file.  In  case  a  high  polish  is  required,  use  what  is 
called  "Beau  Brummel"  by  applying  it  with  the  brush, 
being  careful  not  to  allow  it  to  touch  the  cuticle. 
After  applying-  it  to  all  the  nails  use  the  polisher 
and  rub  gently,  the  same  as  with  the  buffer.  In  case 
the  high  polish  is  not  requested,  finish  the  nail  by 
using  the  dry  polisher,  rubbing  gently  until  a  bril- 
liant, smooth  surface  appears. 

In  case  the  blood  has  been  drawn  by  using  the 
cuticle  knife  or  shears,  apply  tincture  of  iron  or 
Peroxide  of  Hydrogen  to  stop  the  blood  and  act  as 
a  disinfectant. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  in  keeping  the  tools 
well  sterilized  for  in  u«>ing  them  where  a  customer's 


MANICURER'S  MANUAL. 


101 


nails  would  be  diseased,  they  would  convey  the  dis- 
ease to  another  customer  very  easily.  Sterilize  by 
dipping-  them  in  a  fifty  per  cent  solution  of  carbolic 
acid. 


The  material   used  in    manicuring-   can    be   had  or 
any  toilet  supply  house  or  drug  store.     They  consis^ 


102 


MANICURERS'   MANUAL. 


of  Ongaline,  a  liquid,  Nail  powder,  and  Rosaline,  in 
the  form  of  a  paste  and  Beau  Brummel,  a  liquid  put 
up  in  packag-e  with  brush  for  applying-.     Be  very  cau* 


tious  in  keeping-  the  liquids  well  corked  both  while 
using-  and  after  completing  as  they  evaporate  or  lose 
their  strength  and  scent. 
Be  very  careful  not  to  put  the  orang-e  stick  in  the 


bleach  after  cleaning-  the  nail  until  well  wiped  off 
as  the  material  would  soon  be  spoiled  if  dirt  was  al- 


MANICURERS'    MANUAL. 

lowed  to  drop  in  it.     Be  very  careful  not  to  allow  the 
Ongaline  to  touch  or  drop   on   the  clothes,  as  it  wilj 
take  out  the  color  the  same  as  lemon  juice. 
PRICES  FOR  MANICURING. 

The  prices  for  manicuring-  men  and  women  are  usu- 
ally different.  They  rangre  all  the  way  from  25  cents 
to  $1.00;  usually  establishments  that  charg-e  $1.00 
for  men  charg-e  50  cents  for  ladies.  I/adies'  nails 
are  usually  easier  manicured  than  men's.  The  aver- 
ag-e  price  for  the  work,  however,  is  50  cents,  and  it 
requires  from  fifteen  minutes  to  half  an  hour, 

NAIL  TINT. 

Oil  of  Lentise Yz  oz. 

Salt Yz^r. 

Resin 1  scrup. 

Alum 1   scrup. 

Wax 1   scrup. 

NAIIy  POWDE^R. 

Oxide  tin,  very  fine 4  lbs. 

Carmine X  1^^. 

Oil  of  Berg-amot 150  g-rs. 

Oil  of  L<a vender 150  gr» 

FINGER  NAIIy  BLEACH. 

In  case  Ongaline  cannot  be  secured  you  may  use 
lemon  juice  or  Peroxide  of  Hydrogen,  the  only 
trouble  being  that  lemon  juice  soon  spoils,  where 
Ongaline  can  be  kept  always  if  well  corked. 


J.l>*  MASSAGE    MANUAL. 


INSTRUCTIONS   IN   FACIAL 
MASSAGE. 


In  this,  the  Twentieth  Century,  beauty  is  considered  a 
God  Given  Gift  and  its  preservation  a  solemn  duty. 
The  day  for  secrecy  has  gone  by  and  men  and  women 
aliice  now  call  as  regularly  on  their  Massuer  as  upon 
their  Manicurist  and  with  as  little  thought  of  secrecy. 
Age  should  be  a  matter  of  looks  not  of  years,  and 
everyone  may  remain  youiig  if  they  are  willing  to  de- 
vote the  time  and  attention  necessary  for  good  results. 
If  old  age  has  been  creeping  on  apace  and  left  unlovely 
tell-tale  lines  as  a  reminder,  proper  massage  will  rem- 
edy the  evil  and  beauty  be  restored.  That  facial  mas- 
sage has  become  a  necessity  is  recognized  by  the  care- 
fully groomed  man  of  today  as  \\^ell  as  by  my  lady. 
Massage  will  not  alone  do  everything,  but  a  sensible 
diet,  air,  sunshine  and  scrupulous  cleanliness  combined 
with  a  reliable  skin  food  and  correct  massage  will  do 
wonders. 

As  the  first  requisite  for  a  good  complexion  is  thor- 
cuo-h  cleanliness,  we  recommend  the  Automatic  Mas- 
sage,  or  Hydro-Vacu,  as  being  the  best  agent  to  bring 


MASSAGE    MANUAi 


105 


about  the  desired  result,  the  combined  suctions  and 
pressure  opening  up  and  cleansing  the  pores  automat- 
ically. Unless  there  are  deep  lines  the  use  of  the 
Automatic  Massage  will  be  all  that  is  found  necessary, 
as  it  thoroughly  exercises  all  the  muscles  in  the  face, 


AUTOMATIC     OR     HYDRO-VACU. 

but  if  the  unwelcome  lines  are  there,  they  must  be 
worked  out  with  tissue  food  by  the  hand  manipulation. 
Blackheads  disappear  as  if  by  magic  by  this  treatment. 
First. — Make  the  patient  perfectly  comfortable.  If 
a  barber    chair  cannot  be   procured,  use   a   large  easy 


106  MASSAGE   MANUAL. 

chair  that  can  be  tilted  back,  thus  throwing  the  head 
up,  making  it  comfortable  for  both  patient  and  oper- 
ator. Pin  the  hair  back  closely,  remove  the  collar, 
tuck  towel  in  to  protect  the  clothing  and  then  cover 
the  patient  with  the  large  apron,  same  as  used  by  bar- 
bers and  hairdressers.  Ask  the  patient  to  relax  the 
muscles  and  quietly  rest.  Rub  in  thoroughly  the 
Cream,  always  using  a  circular  motion  and  working 
upward  and  outward.  Leave  the  Cream,  which  is  a 
bleach,  on  the  face  while  fixing  the  Automatic  Massage 
Bag  ready  for  use.  If  the  face  is  inclined  to  be  oily 
or  black  heads  are  troublesome,  fill  bag  with  quite 
hot  water.  If  not,  use  lukewarm  water  in  which  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  powdered  boracic  acid  has  been  dissolved. 
Hang  the  bag  about  six  feet  from  the  floor  and  place  the 
outlet  tube  in  pail  with  sufficient  water  in  it  to  cover  end 
of  tube.  Wipe  the  face  with  a  small  towel  or  napkin, 
removing  all  cream.  Now  place  the  Depurater  on  the 
face,  open  the  clasp  and  move  slowly  upward  on  the 
mouth  line  (the  line  running  from  outside  of  nose  to 
the  corner  of  the  mouth)  to  the  nose,  across  the  cheek, 
up  to  the  temple  and  down  across  the  little  lines  which 
form  under  the  eyes.  Move  the  automatic  massage 
slowly  across  these  fine  lines  and  work  in  a  circle 
around  the  cheek  bone,  avoiding  the  lines  at  the  cor- 
ner of  the  eye.     Work  on  the  temples  and  across  the 


MASSAGE    MANUAL.  107 

forehead  m  circles,  always  remembering  to  move  slow- 
ly. After  finishing  one  side  of  the  face,  work  across 
the  chin  and  do  the  other  side  in  the  same  manner.  If 
plump  cheeks  are  wished  for,  work  in  circles  where 
plumpness  is  desired.  If  the  face  is  a  young  one  with 
no  heavy  deep-set  lines  all  that  is  now  necessary  is  to 
rub  in  the  Tissue  Food,  thoroughly  cleanse  and  follow 
with  another  Automatic  Massage  Treatment  using  cold 
water  in  place  of  warm  as  before  described.  The  cold 
water  hardens  the  muscles  and  closes  the  pores.  If  an 
astringent  is  desired,  use  a  small  piece  of  alum  in  the 
cold  water.  An  astringent  is  desirable  where  the  pores 
are  coarse.  After  using  the  cold  water,  wipe  away  all 
traces  of  cream,  powder  and  your  patient  will  leave 
refreshed  in  body  and  mind.  If  tell-tale  lines  of  age 
or  trouble  are  there,  hand  massage  must  follow  the 
use  of  the  Auto  Massage  and  w^arm  water.  In  mas- 
saging keep  the  fingers  moist  with  the  Tissue  Food,  and 
use  only  the  balls  of  the  finger  tips.  Always  massage 
lightly  except  when  wishing  to  reduce  flesh,  as  in  case 
of  a  double  chin  to  be  removed.  Repeat  each  move- 
ment from  twenty-five  to  fifty  times,  according  to  the 
necessity  of  the  case. 

F-i'st  Movement. — Place  the  finger  tips,  both  hands, 
under  the  chin  and  move  upward  to  the  ears  with  a 
light,  gentle,  firm  stroke,  finishing  the  stroke  either  be- 


108 


MASSAGE   MANUAL. 


THIRD   MOVEMENT. 


MASSAGE    MANUAL.  ^09 

hind  the  ears  or  ending  with  a  circular  movement  under 
the  ear. 

Second  Movement. — Place  the  finger  tips  on  the  lines 
and  with  light  even  strokes  work  up,  terminating  each 
stroke  in  the  center  of  the  cheek. 

Third  Movement. — Place  the  finger  tips  in  the  center 
of  the  forehead  and  work  lightly,  smoothing  the  lines 
outward  to  the  hair  at  the  temples. 

Fourth  Movement. — Beginning  at  the  inner  corner  of 
the  eye  on  the  upper  lid^  move  across  to  the  outer  cor- 
ner in  a  curved  line,  using  the  ball  of  the  second  finger, 
and  being  very  careful  not  to  press  heavily  on  the  eye 
ball.  For  the  little  lines  which  form  at  the  inner  cor- 
ner of  the  eye  under  the  lower  lid,  use  a  short  stroke 
beginning  at  the  nose  and  enamg  in  about  the  middle 
of  the  lower  lid. 

Fifth  Movement. — To  preserve  the  cupid's  bow,  place 
the  first  finger  in  the  center  of  the  upper  lip  and  with 
the  thumb  and  second  finger  work  toward  the  center. 
The  stroke  should  be  a  very  short  one  or  the  shape  of 
the  lip  will  be  destroyed.  The  lower  lip  should  be 
treated  in  the  same  manner. 


110 


MASSAGE    MANUAL. 


FIFTH   MOVEMENT. 


Sixth  Movement. — In  massaging  the  throat,  use  the 
rotary  movement  and  massage  much  heavier  than  the 
face.  Use  skin  food  plentifully  and  give  particular 
attention  to  the  tell-tale  lines  of  age  or  stiff  linen  col- 
lars, under  the  ears. 


MASSAGE    MANUAL. 


Ill 


SIXTH   MOVEMENT. 


ANOTHER  METHOD  OF  MANIPULATION. 

First  Movement. — Fingers  under  chin — thumbs  at 
center  of  forehead — slide  thumbs  down  to  chin,  turn 
hand  with  fingers  on  chin  back  to  ears. 

2.  Fingers  under  chin,  thumbs  at  each  side  of  nose, 
slide  thumbs  down  and  out,  turn  fingers  on  chin  back 
to  ears. 

Forehead. — 1.  Fingers  together  at  side  of  forehead, 
slide  forward  with  fingers  of  other  hand  moving  up 
and  down;  reverse. 

2.  Fingers  together,  move  both  hands  up  and  down 
alternately. 


112  MASSAGE    MANUAL. 

3.  Fingers  on  each  side  of  face,  move  thumbs  circular 
on  forehead. 

4.  With  middle  fingers  rub  alternately  upward  be- 
tween eyebrows. 

5.  Fingers  together,  rub  from  between  eyebrows  up- 
ward and  around  to  temples. 

Eyes. — '1.  Fingers  on  chin,  thumbs  together  in  mid- 
dle of  forehead,  circle  around  the  eyes  and  over  the 
eyebrows. 

2.  Fingers  together,  draw  over  the  lids,  spreading  at 
the  corners  of  eyes. 

3.  With  the  thumb  and  middle  finger  together  at 
temple,  slide  apart  and  hold — give  circular  with  fore 
finger  of  right  hand. 

4.  With  middle  finger  circle  over  the  eyelids. 

5.  Fingers  together,  draw  over  the  eyelids,   outward. 
With  fingers  on  chin,  circle  thumbs  on  nose  and  around 

chin. 

Pat  face  with  hands  alternately  upward. 

Palms  of  hands,  circle  hollows  of  cheeks. 

Pinch  cheeks  and  in  front  of  ears  with  thumb  and 
closed  fore  finger,  upward. 

Rub  chin  upward. 

Double  chin,  rub  down  and  low. 

Circle  neck  and  pat  upward. 


MASSAGE   MANUAL.  113 

For  circles  under  eyes,  rub  cheeks  up,  with  thumbs; 
fingers  at  side  of  face. 

Fii?gers  on  foreheaa,  rub  thumbs  from  front  of  ears 
up  to  the  eyes — tight  pressure. 

CLEANSING  CREAM. 

Almond   oil    4     oz. 

White  wax 1     oz. 

Spermaceti     i  oz. 

Put  all  in  double  boiler,  melt  and  stir  with  silver 
fork  until  it  becomes  creamy.  Pour  into  jars  and  when 
cooled  will  be  ready  for  use. 

SKIN   FOOD. 

Almond    oil    4     oz. 

WTiite  wax    1     oz. 

Spermaceti     1     oz. 

Cocoanut  oil 1     oz. 

Lanolin    i  oz. 

Put  all  ingredients  into  a  double  boiler  and  when 
thoroughly  heated  remove  from  fire  and  stir  with  silver 
fork  until  almost  cold.  Then  add  few  drops  of  oil  of 
rose. 

FACE  POWDER. 

Bismuth    oxychloride    1     oz. 

Chalk,  prepared,    finest 2 J  oz. 

French   chalk 5     oz. 


FACE  POWDER. 

Carbonate    of   magnesium    ^  oz. 

Pulverized  tale 1  lb. 

Oil  of  rose    8  drops 

Oil  of  neroli    20  drops 

Extract  of  jasmin    14  oz. 

Extract  of  musk   1  dr. 

Mix  thoroughly  and  pass  through  a  100-mesh  bolting 
cloth. 

FACE  BLEACH. 
Said  to  resemble  Mme.  Rupert's. 

Corrosive   sublimate 8  gr. 

Tincture  of  benzoin 1  dr. 

Water  q.  s.  to  make  8  oz. 

Mix,  apply  night  and  morning. 

FOR  PIMPLES. 

Camphor    10  gr. 

Acacia  pul 20  gr. 

Sulphur  precip 2  drachms 

Lime  water   -. 2  oz. 

Rose  water    2  oz. 

Apply  to  the  face  upon  retiring,  let  dry  and  brush  off 
the  powder. 

TO  REMOVE  BLACKHEADS. 

Ergotine     6  grammes 

Oxide  zinc   14  grammes 

Vaseline     60  grammes 

Wash  the  face  Avith  warm  water,  dry  with  soft  towel, 
apply  ointment  on  retiring,  allow  it  to  remain  on  all 
night. 


MASSAGE  MANUAL.  115 

ELECTRICAL  FACIAL  MASSAGE. 
In  addition  to  the  finger  manipulation,  electric  mas- 
sage has  become  very  popular.  It  is  considered  by 
many  to  be  one  of  the  best  stimulants  we  have.  No 
massage  parlor  is  complete  without  a  battery  for  this 
purpose. 

INSTRUMENTS  REQUIRED. 
The  instruments  or  attachments  necessary  with  the 
battery  are  the  conducting  cords,  metal  handles,  sponge 
disc,  wrist  electrode  and  massage  roller.  The  faradic 
current  is  used  entirely  in  the  massage  work.  A  two- 
cell  battery  is  sufficient,  and  are  what  are  known  as 
dry  cells.  With  ordinary  use,  cells  should  last  from 
six  to  nine  months,  and  when  exhausted  can  be  replaced 
for  50  cents  per  pair.  The  battery  and  attachments 
must  be  handled  with  care.  A  massage  may  be  given 
by  use  of  wrist  electrode,  which  conveys  a  current 
through  the  operator,  or  with  the  sponge  disc  or  roller. 

There  are  a  great  many  manufacturers  of  batteries 
all  working  similar,  but  the  one  illustrated  here  is  put 
up  in  a  wooden  case,  containing  all  the  attachments 
necessary  and  is  portable,  weighs  less  than  10  pounds. 
With  a  battery  of  this  kind  it  is  impossible  to  injure 
the  patient  or  even  administer  a  severe  shock. 


IIG 


MASSAGE  MANUAL. 


MASSAGE  WITH  WRIST  ELECTRODE. 
Place  the  customer  comfortably  in  a  chair,  with  all 
muscles  relaxed;  prepare  your  battery  by  attaching 
the  conducting  cord  to  the  post  marked  (P),  and  to 
the  other  end  attach  metal  handle  and  place  it  in  the 
customer's  hand.  There  will  be  no  benefit  in  massage 
unless  the  patient  holds  the  metal  handle.  Attaching  the 
other  cord  to  the  post  marked  (N)  fasten  the  wrist 
band  around  the  wrist  of  the  right  hand  with  a  sponge 
disc  (thoroughly  wet)  on  the  inside,  so  that  the  sponge 
will  come  in  contact  with  wrist.  This  is  accomplished 
by   first   unscrewing   the   metal   that  holds    the   sponge 


MASSAGE  MANUAL. 


117 


from  the  part  to  which  is  attached  the  cord.  Place 
the  screw  through  the  hole  at  one  end  of  the  wrist 
band,  and  bend  the  wa*ist  band  around,  making  a 
circle,  and  put  the  screw  through  the  slot,  at  the  other 
end  of  the  band;  then  replace  the  part  to  which  the 
cord  is  to  he  attached,  which  fastens  the  band  in  place 
to  be  put  over  the  wrist.     Slip  the  hand  through  the 


band  and  tighten  enough  so  that  the  sponge  will  be 
held  firmly  on  the  wrist.  Attach  the  cord  as  shown 
in  illustration;  then  you  are  ready  to  proceed  with  the 
massage.  Then  turn  the  current  on  by  moving  the 
lever  near    the   post   marked    (N)    from   right   to   left. 


118  MASSAGE  MANUAL. 

The  buzzing  sound  will  denote  the  battery  in  action. 
Proceed  with  the  movement  same  as  described  on  pre- 
ceding pages,  using  either  style  that  yourself  or  cus- 
tomer prefers. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  the  movement  should 
be  enacted  as  rapidly  as  possible,  and  in  no  case  should 
the  battery  be  in  use  over  20  minutes.  If  the  cur- 
rent is  not  sufficiently  strong  to  be  felt  by  patient,  the 
force  may  be  increased  by  drawing  out  the  shield  at  the 
right  of  the  battery;  draw  out  a  short  distance  at  a 
time,  so  that  the  shock  will  not  be  severe.  Gradually 
increase  the  current  to  sufficient  force.  By  this  method 
the  current  passes  through  the  operator  to  patient, 
connection  being  formed  only  as  the  fingers  are  placed 
on  face  of  the  patient. 

MASSAGE  WITH  THE  ROLLER. 

In  using  the  roller  massage  in  place  of  wrist  electrode, 
electricity  is  conveyed  direct  to  the  patient,  and  not 
through  operator.  The  roller  should  only  be  used 
after  completing  the  work  of  finger  manipulation.  De- 
tach wrist  electrode  from  cord  and  attach  in  its  place 
the  roller   with   wooden   handle. 

The  patient  must  hold  metal  handle  attached  to  sec- 
ond cord,  as  formerly  described.  The  connection  is 
formed  as  soon  as  the  r<^ller  is  placed  on  the  face,  and 


MASSAGE  MANUAL. 


liU 


the  lever  turned  to  the  left,  putting  the  battery  in 
operation.  The  same  buzzing  sound  denotes  the  bat- 
tery  in  working  order. 

It  is  essential  that  the  customer  is  laid  back  in  a 
comfortable  position,  to  get  the  best  results  of  the 
treatment.  In  using  the  roller,  on  the  face,  roll  up  and 
never  down,  on  the   same  principle  that   you   massage 


the  face.  Underneath  the  eyes,  the  roller  is  to  be 
carried  lightly  in  a  rounding  movement.  On  the  side 
of  the  face  the  lines  can  be  crossed  and  a  little  more 
pressure  used.  Across  the  forehead  smooth  the  lines  as 
much  as  possible  by  drawing  the  skin  lightly  between 


120  MASSAGE  MANUAL. 

the  thumb  and  finger  of  left  hand  and  follow  with  roller 
in  right  hand. 

The  roller  should  never  be  used  more  than  ten  min- 
utes. The  chamois  covering  the  roller  must  be  soaked 
in  water  in  order  to  better  convey  the  electricity.  Tt 
will  be  well  to  use  cologne  water  or  some  scented 
water,  as  it  will  be  more  pleasant  for  your  patient.  Be 
very  careful  to  use  a  mild  current,  otherwise  the  roller 
will  be  an  instrument  of  torturi"*  rather  than  the  pleas- 
ant sensation  that  is  desired.  \  k  all  work  the  positive 
pole  is  the  one  to  be  attached  t  >  the  roller,  or  sponge 
disc. 

MASSAGE  WITH  THE  SPONGE  DISC. 
The  sponge  disc  should  only  be  used  after  completing 
work  of  finger  manipulation.  Attach  the  sponge  disc, 
well  soaked  in  water,  to  the  cord  in  place  of  the  roller. 
The  roller  is  to  be  unscrewed  from  the  wood  handle 
and  sponge  disc  to  take  its  place.  Use  the  handle  at- 
tached to  the  sponge  disc,  in  the  right  hand,  and  go 
over  the  entire  face  in  a  rotary  movement,  always  work- 
ing from  lower  part  of  the  face  up.  The  patient  must 
hold  the  metal  handle  as  before.  It  is  best  to  use 
cold  water,  and  if  the  face  is  too  soft,  a  little  alum, 
which  helps  close  the  pores  and  harden  the  skin,  can 
be  used. 


MASSAGE  MANUAL. 


121 


As  this  is  the  last  part  of  the  work,  before  applying 
the  powder  cold  water  is  preferable.  It  is  better  to 
have  it  mildly  perfumed. 


ELECTRIC  DEPERATOR. 

A  new  form  of  deperator  (which  is  the  cup  used  with 
automatic  massage),  has  recentlj  ^^een  invented,  and  is 
so  constructed  that  it  allows  the  use  of  electric  bat- 
tery while  using  automatic  massage.  The  work  should 
proceed  as  in  the  use  of  old  style  cup,  except  that  the 
patient  is  to  hold  the  metal  handle  attached  to  the 
battery.  The  other  cord  is  attached  to  the  deperator. 
This  cord,  of  course,  must  be  the  same  to  which  the 
wrist  electrode,  roller  or  sponge  disc  has  been  at- 
tached. This  method  affords  a  pleasant  and  soothing 
sensation,  while  using  automatic  massage.  Electricity 
being  fatal  to  germs,  all  danger  of  disease  is  averted 
and  impurities  of  the  skin  entirely  eradicated. 


122  MASSAGE  MANUAL. 

FACE  POWDER. 

In  all  methods  of  massageing  it  is  best  to  finish  your 
work  with  a  small  amount  of  pure  vegetable  powder, 
applied  with  a  chamois.  It  will  be  found  very  essen- 
tial that  you  avoid  the  cheaper  brands,  that  may  do 
more  injury  to  the  skin  than  benefit. 

In  case  you  prepare  your  own  powder,  it  will  be 
well  to  bolt  it  several  times  after  being  mixed,  using  a 
fine  mesh  bolting  cloth.  Powder  should  always  be  used 
before  the  freshly  massaged  face  comes  in  contact  with 
the  outer  air  or  sun. 

It  is  well  to  instruct  your  patient  to  remove  all 
powder  by  thoroughly  cleansing  the  face  each  night 
before  retiring.  The  purest  substance  may  often  be- 
come harmful  unless  this  rule  is  observed. 

Any  of  the  instruments  used  in  electric  massage  can 
be  had  at  the  Moler  Supply  House,  39  Peck  Ct.,  Chi- 
cago, Ills. 

VIBRATORY  FACIAL  MASSAGE. 

Vibratory  Facial  Massage  is  given  with  an  apparatus 
made  for  this  purpose,  and  by  its  use  as  much  work 
can  be  accomplished  in  five  minutes  as  with  the  ordi- 
nary finger  manipulation  in  one-half  hour.  The  same 
precaution  should  be  observed  in  following  the  musclee- 
and  lines  of  the  face,  as  with  the  finger  manipula- 
tion, and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  overdo  the  work. 


MASSAGE  MANUAL.  123 

INSTRUMENTS  NECESSARY. 

The  articles  necessary  in  addition  to  the  vibrator  are 
the  apparatus  for  attaching  to  the  electric  plug,  the 
motor,  a  hand-piece  and  straps,  the  rubber  cup  with 
handles,  and  hard  rubber  disc.  The  hand  massage  is 
recommended,  but  where  the  rubber  cup  is  desired,  it 
can  be  attached  by  a  spring  at  the  end  of  a  wire  arm. 
The  motion  given  to  the  machine  is  a  short  vibration, 
the  stroke  of  which  can  be  lengthened  or  shortened  by 
an  adjustment  for  that  purpose.  The  motor  is  hung 
on  springs  from  an  iron  stand,  and  the  entire  apparatus 
on  rollers,  so  it  can  easily  be  moved  from  one  chair 
to  another  as  it  is  needed.  The  machine  must  be  kept 
well  oiled,  with  all  bolts  and  screws  tightened.  Too 
much  care  cannot  be  given  this  one  particular  point, 
as  it  would  soon  mean  the  entire  destruction  of  the 
machine  to  neglect  this. 

The  straps  and  pads  used  for  fastening  the  Rands  to 
the  apparatus  can  be  detached  and  should  be  washed 
and  sterilized  frequently.  The  rubber  cup  should  be 
sterilized   after   each    operation. 

FIRST  WORK. 
Prepare     your     customer     the     same     as     described 
in    former    instruction,   by   application    of    cream    and, 
if     necessary,     the    use     of    the     automatic     massage. 


124 


MASSAGE  MANUAL. 


Start  with  having  the  fingers  well  anointed  in  the 
massage  cream,  after  fastening  the  right  hand  to  the 
machine.  Take  your  position  on  one  side  of  the  chair 
with  the  apparatus  on  the  other.  Place  your  left  hand 
on  the  customer's  head  in  such  a  way  as  to  steady  it 
Start  the  machine  in   motion  by  turning  on  the  elec- 


tricity, and  proceed  by  allowing  the  fingers  to  gently 
tap  the  face.  Practice  will  aid  greatly  in  this  work. 
When  manipulation  is  being  accomplished  by  rapid 
movement  of  the  hand,  it  affords  a  very  pleasant  sensa- 
tion to  the  patient   as   well   as   the   operator.     It   will 


MASSAGE  MANUAL.  125 

be  found  that  only  one  side  of  the  face  can  be  mas- 
saged without  moving  the  apparatus  or  revolving  the 
chair.  The  ordinary  revolving  barber  chair  is  best  for 
this  purpose,  as  it  is  of  convenient  height  and  aids 
the  operator  to  move  the  patient's  face  in  a  better  posi- 
tion to   be  massaged. 

The    instruments    can    be    had   at   the   Moler   Supply 
House,  39  Peck  Court,  Chicago,  111. 


ELECTROLYSIS. 

Electrolysis  is  the  science  of  removing  superfluous 
hair,  warts,  moles  and  other  blemishes  by  use  of  the 
electric  needle.  It  is  a  science  comparatively  new  to 
the  general  world,  although  one  that  is  old  in  medical 
profession.  Dr.  Hayes,  in  his  book  of  Facial  Blemishes, 
as  far  back  as  1889,  has  said  about  the  method: 

"The  employment  of  electricity  for  removal  of  super- 
fluous hair  has  stood  the  test  for  not  less  than  13  years 
by  the  profession,  and  the  verdict  is  that  it  has  come 
to   stay. 

"I  well  remember  the  unfriendly  criticism  of  some 
members  of  the  medical  profession  who  had  less  knowl- 
edge of  the  physics  and  therapeutics  of  electricity  than 
some  other  branch  of  the  medical  science.  That  time 
of  criticism  is  passed  away,  and  the  success  of  the 
operation  depends  upon  the  skill  of  the   operator.     So 


ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL.  127 

many  have  proven  the  competency  of  the  process,  that 
if  a  failure  is  recorded  the  operator  and  not  the  method 
is  to  be  blamed." 

Closely  related  to  superfluous  hair  are  naevi  and 
other  facial  blemishes,  in  the  removal  of  which  elec- 
tricity in  some  of  its  modifications  serve  as  principal 
or  an  adjuvant. 

This  work  since  the  days  of  Dr.  Hayes  has  been  im- 
proved upon,  although  practically  the  same  method  is 
employed.  In  the  use  of  the  apparatus  that  we  recom- 
mend for  this  purpose,  no  harm  can  come  to  the  pa- 
tient unless  a  slight  scar,  and  this  can  be  avoided  if 
the  work  is  done  properly.  Only  carelessness  or  an 
entire  disregard  for  instructions  on  the  following  pages 
would  be  the  only  cause  that  would  result  in  any 
harm. 

This  work  has  been  considered  a  dangerous  opera- 
tion by  many,  but  with  reasonable  caution  it  can  be 
done  with  as  good  results  by  a  beginner  as  by  an 
expert. 

The  principal  requirement  is  a  reasonably  good  sight 
and  steady  nerves;  not  over  one-half  hour  at  each  sit- 
ting should  be  devoted  to  the  work  without  a  rest. 

In  removing  superfluous  hair  from  the  face  one  should 
try  to  remember  that  not  m'bre  than  one  should  be  re- 
moved in  the  same  part  of  the  face.     This  is  to  avoid 


128  ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL. 

inflammation  by  too  many  punctures  of  the  needle  in 
close  proximity.  In  order  to  destroy  the  hair  the  needle 
must  enter  the  follicle,  which  is  the  tissue  around  the 
hair,  and  penetrates  down  the  sheath  at  the  aide  of 
the  hair  to  the  papilla  or  root  of  the  hair.  The  object 
ia  to  destroy  as  little  tissue  as  possible  in  destroying 
the  hair.  The  amount  of  the  tissue  destroyed  depends 
on  the  length  of  time  the  needle  is  left  in  the  place. 

One  great  trouble  in  electrolysis  is  being  able  to 
follow  the  sheath  to  the  papilla,  or  root,  as  there  are 
usually  sebaceous  glands  or  sacks  in  which  the  needle 
will  sometimes  find  its  way  in  place  of  following  the 
hair  to  the  root.  Another  trouble  in  following  the 
sheath  is  that  the  hair  does  not  always  grow  from  the 
papilla  to  the  surface  of  the  skin  in  straight  lines.  It 
sometimes  leaves  the  skin  slanted  in  a  certain  direction 
while  the  undergrowth  is  in  another. 

In  addition  to  the  treatment  of  superfluous  hair,  the 
electric  needle  will  be  found  most  useful  in  remov- 
ing warts,  and  moles,  leaving  the  surface  perfectly 
smooth  and  without  a  scar,  if  the  work  is  done  prop- 
erly. This  method  is  considered  far  superior  to  any 
other  process  in  cases  where  no  more  than  one-third 
of  an  inch  in  diameter  is  to  be  treated. 


ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL. 


120 


APPARATUS  REQUIRED. 
The  galvanic  battery  is  used  for  this  work  and 
should  consist  of  at  least  six  cells.  It  is  so  arranged 
that  any  number  of  cells  can  be  used,  as  the  force 
of  the  current  is  required.  A  connecting  plate  is  so 
arranged  with  figures  that  there  is  no  danger  of  using 
too  strong  a  current,  when  a  milder  one  is  desired.  One 
connection,  marked  (X),  and  to  this  one  is  always  at- 
tached the  needle  cord. 

The  complete  outfit,  in  addition  to  the  battery,  con- 
sists of  two  conducting  cords,  a  needle  holder,  needles  of 
assorted  sizes,  magnifying  glass,  tweezers,  a  sponge  disc 
and  one  copy  of  Dr.  Hayes'  book  on  Facial  Blemishes. 


130  ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL. 

To  this  outfit  can  be  added  a  head  light,  if  satisinc- 
tory  daylight  cannot  be  had.  The  needle  holder  is  of 
hard  rubber  with  steel  lining,  and  so  constructed  that 
the  blades  grasp  the  needle  and  close  on  it,  holding  it  in 
place  by  means  of  an  inner  screw.  The  conducting 
cords  are  composed  of  fine  copper  wire,  covered  with 
tape,  and  attached  to  each  end  is  a  metal  which  is  to 
be  inserted  in  the  plate  of  the  battery,  and  to  the 
sponge  disc,  on  which  the  patients  place  their  hands 
while  being  operated  upon. 

The  sponge  disc  should  always  be  dampened  before 
beginning  the  operation.  The  magnifying  glass  is  not 
always  considered  essential,  but  in  most  cases  it  will 
be  needed.  The  forceps  are  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
moving the  hair  after  the  needle  has  done  its  work 
and  should  have  blunt  ends. 

The  head  light  can  only  be  used  where  electricity  is 
accessible.  Needles  are  of  steel,  platinum,  and  in  some 
instances,  gold  and  silver.  The  steel  is  preferred  for 
removing  superfluous  hair,  and  is  the  needle  with  the 
bulbous  end.  A  sharp  needle  is  more  apt  to  penetrate 
the  sheath,  but  it  is  the  one  used  in  removing  warts 
and  moles.  The  disc  may  be  made  either  of  sponge  or 
heavy  felt,  attached  to  a  rubber  back,  in  which  the 
fastener  for  the  cord  is  attached.  The  needle  is  only 
off'ective  while  the  patient's  hand  rests  upon  the  elec- 


ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL.  131 

trode.      A    reclining    chair    should    be    used    for    this 
work. 

FIRST  WORK. 

First  place  your  patient  in  a  comfortable  posi- 
tion and  cover  with  a  spread  similar  to  the  one 
used  by  hairdressers  and  massuers.  This  is  to 
protect  their  garments  while  being  operated  upon. 
As  stated  previously,  if  good  daylight  is  not  affordable 
the  artificial  light  must  be  so  arranged  that  it  will 
shine  on  every  part  of  the  face.  When  you  have  the 
battery  in  place,  on  a  convenient  table  with  the  needles 
and  discs  connected,  you  are  ready  to  work.  Be  care- 
ful that  the  hands  are  made  antiseptic  by  washing  them 
in  a  mild  solution  of  formalin.  This  is  very  essential 
and  it  is  also  necessary  to  sterilize  all  instruments  be- 
fore and  after  each  operation.  Place  the  electrode  in 
the  patient's  lap,  in  an  easy  position  to  rest  the  hand 
upon;  at  the  same  time  instruct  the  patient  not  to 
place  the  hand  upon  it  until  directed.  Connect  the  cord 
of  the  negative  electrode,  or  needle  cord,  to  the  number 
of  cells  that  you  wish  to  use,  usually  starting  with  no 
more  than  two  or  three. 

Take  an  easy  position  at  the  side,  or  partly  in  front 
of  the  patient,  bathe  the  part  of  the  face  to  be  oper- 
ated upon  with  dioxygen  by  using  a  small  piece  of 
cotton  saturated  in  the  fluid.     Tlirow  the  cotton  away 


132 


ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL. 


after  using.  Now  pick  up  the  needle  holder  with  the 
bulbous  needle,  holding  it  in  the  right  hand,  at  the  same 
time  taking  up  the  forceps  between  the  second,  third 
and  fourth  fingers  and  palm  of  the  same  hand,  the  needle 


holder  being  held  by  the  first  finger  and  thumb.  The 
needle  is  now  ready  to  be  inserted  at  the  side  of  the 
hair  as  it  emerges  from  the  side  of  the  skin.  Allow  it 
to  follow  the  hair  until  it  strikes  a  slight  ob- 
struction. This  is  supposed  to  be  the  papilla  of  the 
hair. 


ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL.  133 

Now  instruct  the  patient  to  place  the  hands  on  the 
electrode.  This  forms  a  connection  and  starts  the  needle 
in  its  work  of  destroying  the  tissue.  If  the  number  of 
cells  you  are  using  are  strong  enough,  oxygen,  or  a 
froth- like  substance,  will  appear  at  the  point  where 
the  needle  is  inserted,  usually  within  five  or  ten  seconds 
from  time  connection  is  made.  If  the  oxygen  does  not 
make  its  appearance,  the  cells  are  not  strong  enough, 
and  others  must  be  added  until  this  result  is  ob- 
tained. 

Now,  instruct  your  patient  to  remove  the  hand  from 
the  electrode,  remove  the  needle,  and  with  the  forceps 
try  lightly  to  remove  the  hair.  The  needle  can  be  held 
in  the  hand  at  the  same  time,  or  it  can  be  held  in 
the  mouth  while  trying  the  hair.  If  the  hair  does  not 
remove  readily  the  needle  should  be  again  inserted. 
Instruct  the  subject  to  place  the  hands  on  the  electrode 
again,  and  in  another  few  seconds  try  the  hair  again. 
If  the  needle  has  followed  the  follicle  to  the  papilla,  it 
should  be  removed  very  readily,  but  if  it  does  not  after 
a  second  trial  use  force  enough  to  remove  the  hair,  in- 
sert the  needle,  following,  as  near  as  possible,  the  follicle 
or  course  of  hair.  Instruct  the  patient  to  lay  the 
hand  on  the  electrode  again,  and  this  time  you  mny 
be  able  to  reach  the  papilla,  where  you  have  failed  pre- 
viously, and  by  this  insertion  the  root  will  be  destroyed. 


134  ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL. 

Dr.  Hayes,  in  his  book  of  Facial  Blemishes  states:  "If 
the  amount  of  gas  disengaged  around  the  needle  be 
great  and  the  appearance  of  the  tissue  indicates  that 
there  has  been  such  a  destruction  of  tissue  as  may  re- 
sult in  a  noticeable  scar,  or  something  approximating 
thereto,  it  will  be  wise  on  your  part  to  desist  from 
operating  on  the  hair.  I  find,  however,  that  should 
the  hair  be  allowed  to  remain,  it  is  quite  liable  to  cause 
irritation  to  the  sore  which  results.  I  therefore  re- 
move the  hair,  knowing  that  it  will  return  again,  and 
that  in  my  second  attempt  my  success  may  be  demon- 
strated by  the  ease  with  which  the  hair  is  removed." 
It  will  be  better  to  insert  the  needle  before  directing 
your  patient  to  lay  the  hand  on  the  electrode,  also  be- 
fore the  needle  is  to  be  removed.  It  must  be  remem- 
berd  that  you  should  not  allow  the  needle  to  remain 
long  enough  to  destroy  sufficient  tissue  to  form  a  scar. 
In  case  the  sheath  of  the  hair  and  the  outer  skin  are 
so  firm  that  it  is  difficult  to  follow  the  follicle  you  will 
sometimes  find  it  necessary  to  instruct  the  patient  to 
lay  the  hand  on  the  electrode  before  the  needle  is  in- 
serted and  to  pass  the  needle  around  the  hair  to 
cauterize  the  cuticle  which  will  allow  the  hair  to  be 
removed,  bringing  with  it  the  root  sheath.  The  needle 
can  then  be  inserted  in  place  of  the  hair  to  destroy  tiie 
papiUa.     The    sheath    of   the    hair   is   not   likely    to    be 


ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL.  135 

disturbed  in  pulling  the  hair  from  its  place,  or  the 
sheath  may  draw  part  way  out  and  block  the  entrance. 
This  would  make  it  impossible  to  reach  the  papilla. 

In  cases  where  the  hair  protrudes  in  one  direction 
and  the  root  in  the  other,  you  will  sometimes  be  able 
to  straighten  the  course  by  stretching  the  cuticle  in  one 
direction  or  another.  When  in  doubt  of  having  reach'^d 
the  root  of  the  hair,  it  is  well  to  allow  the  needle  to 
remain  as  long  as  it  seems  safe  to  do  so  without  caus- 
ing a  scar. 

If  you  have  not  destroyed  the  hair  you  will  doubtless 
aid  in  doing  so  the  next  operation.  Hair  growing  in  this 
manner  is  called  lango  hair.  It  is  not  usually  as  deep 
in  the  roots  as  in  ordinary  cases. 

In  connecting  the  battery  the  positive  plate  would 
destroy  the  hair  as  effectively,  but  there  is  more  dan- 
ger of  leaving  a  scar.  The  galvanic  current  is  the  only 
one  that  can  be  used  effectively  in  doing  the  work. 

In  first  beginning  the  practice  of  electrolysis  it  would 
be  well  to  begin  by  operating  upon  the  arm  or  some 
part  of  the  body  not  as  sensitive  as  the  face,  and  where 
a  slight  scar  would  not  be  a  disfigurement.  There  are 
many  little  points  that  will  be  gathered  from  this  prac- 
tice that  cannot  be  illustrated  otherwise. 

Again  quoting  Dr.  Hayes:  "WTien  the  negative  elec- 
trode   is    used    for    electrolysis,    as    in    the    cases    pre- 


136  ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL. 

viously  stated,  we  have  the  action  of  potassium  and 
sodium  hydrates,  which  destroy  the  tissue  without  coag- 
ulating the  albumen.  The  activity  of  the  caustic 
alkalies  not  being  interfered  with  by  an  insoluble  bar- 
rier of  coagulated  albumen,  causes  the  tissues  to  be 
destroyed  to  a  much  greater  distance  from  the  needle 
than  as  though  the  positive  pole  had  been  used.  In 
addition  to  the  liberation  of  the  caustic  alkalies,  we 
have  also  the  appearance  of  hydrogen,  which,  on  ac- 
count of  its  high  diffusibility,  passes  between  the  inter- 
stices of  the  cells  and  causes  a  mechanical  disintegra- 
tion of  tissue.  A  certain  portion  of  the  hydrogen  be- 
coming mingled  with  the  albuminous  fluids  of  the  tis- 
sues forms  a  froth  which  appears  around  the  needle  and 
serves  as  an  index  to  the  strength  of  the  current  and 
the  rapidity  of  the  destruction  of  tissue." 

After  completing  your  work,  which  should  not  be 
over  one-half  hour  session,  treat  the  part  operated  on 
with  zinc  ointment.  A  perfectly  pure  massage  cream 
could  be  used,  but  zinc  ointment  is  preferable.  In- 
struct your  patient  to  allow  the  ointment  to  remain 
on  the  face  as  long  as  possible  before  leaving  the  room, 
and  to  use  no  soap  or  water.  Until  the  trace  of  the 
needle  has  disappeared  renew  the  zinc  ointment  treat- 
ment twice  a  day  by  rubbing  it  well  into  the  skin. 
Other  portions  of  the  face  can  be  washed  as  usual. 


ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL.  137 

Great  care  must  be  taken  that  no  substances  are 
allowed  to  come  in  contact  with  the  portion  of  the  face 
that  is  operated  on,  that  will  in  any  way  irritate  or 
poison  it,  as  it  will  be  more  likely  to  end  in  a  soar. 

If  the  pain  caused  your  patient  is  too  great  using 
the  number  of  cells  required  to  destroy  quickly,  lessen 
the  number,  but  in  this  case  the  needle  must  be  left 
in  place  longer,  in  order  to  do  its  work.  Usually  the 
pain  to  the  patient,  on  the  upper  lip,  is  greater  than 
other  parts  of  the  face,  but  in  many  instances  the  fluid 
from  the  needle  is  to  be  inserted  in  the  follicle  before 
the  connection  is  made.  It  is  best  to  stretch  the  skin 
with  the  finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  before  in- 
serting the  needle.  This  will  help  in  locating  it  and 
lessen  the  pain.  It  is  best  not  to  remove  hairs  from 
the  face  where  there  is  an  eruption.  As  a  rule,  from 
60  to  100  hairs  can  be  removed  per  hour,  by  skilled 
operators.  The  length  of  time  for  each  hair,  how- 
ever, varies  according  to  the  condition.  Hairs  on  the 
upper  lip  and  cheeks  can  be  destroyed  in  less  time  than 
any  other  place. 

REMOVING   WARTS   AND   MOLES. 

In  the  removal  of  warts  and  moles,  the  same  galvanic 
current  is  used,  but  usually  with  more  cells.  As  a  rule, 
six  cells  will  be  necessary  for  this  work,  and  a  sharp- 


138  ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL. 

pointed  needle  to  fake  the  place  of  the  bulbous  one. 
Needles  for  this  work  are  often  made  of  platinum  and 
sometimes  of  gold.  It  is  generally  considered  that  they 
lessen   the   inflammation. 

There  are  a  great  many  varieties  of  moles  and 
warts,  but  are  all  treated  nearly  the  same.  Prepare 
your  patient  the  same  as  for  treating  superfluous  hair, 
using  the  same  precautions  in  cleaning  the  hands,  in- 
struments and  part  to  be  operated  upon.  It  is  essen- 
tial in  this  work  that  everything  be  surgically  clean.  If 
the  mole  is  covered  with  hair  it  is  necessary  to  remove 
it  first  in  the  same  manner  that  has  been  directed. 
If  in  removing  the  hair  the  part  around  the  mole  be 
inflamed  or  reddened,  it  is  not  best  to  proceed  imme- 
diately to  remove  the  mole.  In  some  cases  it  will  re- 
quire two  or  three  sittings  to  remove  the  hair  and 
prepare  the  mole  to  be  operated  upon. 

After  using  instruments,  it  is  very  essential  that  you 
instruct  your  patient  to  treat  by  applying  zinc  oint- 
ment, and  in  several  cases  it  is  better  not  to  try  to  re- 
move the  mole  until  the  effects  of  the  needle  are  en- 
tirely eradicated. 

In  removing  the  mole  start  at  the  point  about  level 
with  the  surface  and  direct  the  needle  straight  through, 
coming  out  on  the  oposite  side  about  the  same  point. 
Direct  your  patient  to  place  hand  on  electrode,  and  if 


ELECTROLYSIS   MANUAL.  139 

the  current  is  strong  enough,  it  will  be  denoted  by  the 
changed  appearance  of  the  mole  and  by  the  bubbles  that 
will  appear  at  the  side  of  the  needle.  Hold  in  place 
thirty  seconds.  Instruct  the  patient  to  remove  the  hand 
from  the  electrode  and  remove  the  needle.  If  the  cuticle 
surrounding  the  mole  has  not  become  much  inflamed, 
proceed  again  as  before,  starting  at  another  point,  often- 
times crossing  the  first  puncture.  It  should  not  be 
necessary  to  work  more  than  five  minutes  on  one  mole. 
It  is  well  to  commence  with  fewer  cells  and  gradually 
increase  until  you  have  a  suflQcient  number,  rather  than 
to  try  to  proceed  rapidly. 

In  many  cases  the  moles  are  not  elevated,  but  are 
level  with  the  surface  of  surrounding  cuticle.  Some 
are  covered  with  hair  and  others  are  not.  In  port  wine 
marks,  which  are  broken  veins,  it  is  often  necessary  to 
use  a  network  of  needles  so  fixed  that  they  are  the 
same  length  and  are  equal  distances  apart.  They  are 
often  joined  in  sets,  as  many  as  twelve  on  a  disc. 
These  can  only  be  used  on  level  surfaces.  In  other  in- 
stances, the  single  needles  should  be  used.  The  usual 
price  for  an  operation  is  $1.00  for  a  half-hour  sitting. 

Among  a  few  dont's  that  Dr.  Hayes  suggests  for 
Electrolysis,  are  the  following: 

"Don't   use  a  sharp-pointed  needle. 

"Don't  attach  the  needle  to  the  positive  pole. 


140  ELECTROLYSIS  MANUAL. 

"Don't  use  too  strong  a  current. 

"Don't  continue  the  current  long  enough  to  leave  a 
visible   scar. 

"Don't  remove  two  hairs  in  close  proximity  to  each 
other. 

"Don't  attempt  to  remove  a  hair  near  an  acne  pustule. 
"IN    REMOVING    OTHER    FACIAL    BLEMISHES    BY 
MEANS  OF  ELECTROLYSIS: 

"Don't  use  a  blunt-pointed  needle. 

"Don't  use  too  weak  a  current. 

"Don't  attempt  the  removal  by  electrolysis  of  a  rapid- 
growing  vascular  naevus  of  more  than  one-third  inch 
in  diameter. 

"Don't  attempt  the  cure  of  acne  or  rosacea  by  elec- 
tricity only. 

"IN  GENERAL. 

"Don't  attempt  to  use  a  faradic  current  for  electroly- 
sis. 

"Don't  use  a  steel  needle  with  a  positive  pole. 

"Don't  have  the  cords  too  short. 

"Don't  make  and  break  the  current  in  metallic  cir- 
cuit. 

"Don't  have  poor  connections  between  the  electrodes 
and  the  battery. 

"Don't  allow  the  patient  to  remove  the  eschar. 

"Don't  attempt  electrolysis  in  young  children." 


CHIROPODY. 

Chiropody  treats  on  the  ailments  of  the  feet.  Actual 
practice,  such  as  our  college  provides  for  its  students, 
is,  of  course,  the  best  experience.  We  do  not  pretend  to 
go  deep  into  the  study  of  anatomy,  but  rather  to  give 
a  practical  course  that  will  enable  one  to  treat  the 
different  diseases  in  a  practical  manner.  For  the  sake 
of  enabling  the  students  to  understand  the  cause  of 
the  disease  they  are  treating,  we  will  give  a  brief  de- 
scription of  the  anatomy  of  the  foot. 

It  will  be  seen  by  the  following  pages  that  the  most 
frequent  causes  of  the  trouble  of  this  kind  are  in 
neglect.  These  ailments  are  easily  combated,  and  with 
the  proper  advice  to  the  patient,  permanently  cured. 
The  original  cause  of  the  corn  will  also  cause  its  return, 
no  matter  how  effective  the  cure  may  be  during  the 
treatment.  It  is,  therefore,  essential  that  you  instruct 
your  patient  carefully  regarding  the  care  of  the  feet, 
both  in  relation  to  wearing  apparel  and  other  causes. 
Well-fitted  shoes  is  one  of  the  most  essential  thincrs. 
Neither  too  tight  or  too  loose,  a  well-supported  instep 
and  not  too  high  heels.  The  sole  should  be  reason- 
ably heavy,  but  to  a  certain  extent  pliable.  Patent 
leather  is  not  to  be  recommended,  as  it  prevents  the 
circulation  that  is  allowed  with  the  ordinary  leather. 
Try  to  guard  your  patient  against  wearing  hosiery  with 


142  CHIKOPODY   MA:NUAL. 

coloring  matter  that  is  poisonous.  The  fit  is  as  essen- 
tial as  the  shoe.  Cotton  hosiery  is  the  best  for  all 
occasions. 

A  chiropody  parlor  should  be  furnished  with  booths 
or  small  apartments,  well  lighted.  An  easy  chair 
should  be  provided  for  the  subject,  with  a  low  stool  for 
the  operator,  a  foot  tub  with  apparatus  for  hot  and 
cold  water  convenient.  The  greatest  danger  is  in  the 
line  of  blood  poison,  and  great  care  should  be  taken  in 
sterilizing  instruments  before  and  after  each  operation, 
as  well  as  keeping  everything  surgically  clean  in  con- 
nection with  the  establishment. 

Dr.  Alexander  Clark,  in  his  book  of  Pedic  Surgery, 
gives  the  following  Latin  medical  terms  and  definitions. 
While  the  study  of  these  is  not  absolutely  necessary 
in  the  practice  of  Chiropody,  they  are  well  to  under- 
stand : 

Abductor  pollicis  pedis — A  muscle  of  the  great  toe. 

Abductor  minimi  digite  pedis — A  muscle  of  the  little 
toe. 

Aqua — Water. 

Articulation — The  connection  of  the  bones  with  each 
other. 

Astragalus — A  short  bone  of  the  tarsus,  ankle  bone. 
Calcisos — The  largest  bone  of  the  heel. 


CHIROPODY  MANUAL.  143 

Cuneiformos — A  name  applied  to  three  bones  of  the 
tarsus. 

Cuboidesos — A  tarsal  bone  of  the  foot. 

Clavus  durus — Hard  corn. 

Clavus   mollis — Soft    corn. 

Digiti — Toes. 

Digitalis  pedis — A  toe. 

Dorsum  pedis — Back   of   the   foot. 

Douche — In  therapeutics,  a  dash  of  water. 

Extensor — To  extend. 

Fibio  tarsal  articulation — The  articulation  of  the  foot 
with  the  leg. 

Flexor — To  bend. 

Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis  perforatus — A  flexor 
muscle  of  the  toe  situated  at  the  middle  part  of  the 
foot. 

Flexor  longus  pollicis  pedis — A  flexor  muscle  of  the 
great  toe,  situated  at  the  posterior  part  of  the  leg. 

Flexor  brevis  pollicis  pedis — A  flexor  muscle  of  the 
great  toe,  situated  at  the  anterior  and  the  middle  part 
of  the  sole  of  the  foot. 

Hydropathy — Water  cure. 

Gastrocnemius — Largest  muscle  on  posterior  of  leg. 

Integument — To  cover  or  envelope. 

Interossei  pedis — The  small  muscles  situated  between 

the  metatarsal  bones. 


I 


144  CHIROPODY   MANUAL. 

Invclucrum — The  sould  bone  or  case  that  encloses  the 
desid  bone. 

Lochia — cleansing. 

Metatarsus — A  term  applied  to  the  several  bones  of 
the  foot. 

Metatarsal  os — Consists   of   five  small  bones,   one  to 
each   toe. 

Musculus — A  muscle. 

Muscular    fibre — The    fleshy    fibre    which    forms    the 
body  of  the  muscle. 

Muscular    arteries — Arteries    that    distribute    to    the 
muscles. 

Muscular  veins — Veins  that  bring  back  the  blood  car- 
ried to  the  muscles  by  the  muscular  arteries. 

Muscular    motion — Motion    caused    by    contraction    of 
the  muscles. 

Naviculare  os — Two  bones  of  the  instep. 

Necrosis — A  state  of  the  bones  where  it  is  deprived 
of  life,  it  is  popularly  known  as  fever  sore. 

Onyxis — An  ingrowing  or  inverted  toe  nail. 

Ostitis — Inflammation  of  the  bone. 

Pernio — A  chilblain. 

Pernio   simplex — A     chilblain    in    which    the     skin    is 
unbroken. 

Pernio  exulceratus — A  chilblain  accompanied  with  ul 
ceration. 


ClllROrODY   MANUAL.  145 

Pediluvium — Foot  bath. 

Phalanges — Toes. 

Plantar  planaris — From  planta  the  sole  of  the  foot. 

Plantar  arteries — Two  arteries,  an  external  and  an 
internal,  arising  from  the  external  of  the  posterior  tibial. 

Plantar  ligaments — The  inferior  ligaments  of  t  he 
tarsus  and  metatarsus. 

Rete  mucosum— A  term  applied  to  a  supposed  mucous 
substance  between  the  cuticle  and  the  true  skin. 

Scaphoid— A  bone  situated  in  the  fore  part  of  the 
foot. 

Sesamoid — ^Bones  of  the  great  toe. 

Tarsal  articulation — The  union  of  the  tarsal  bones. 

Tarso  extensor  minor — The  plantaris  muaole. 

Tarso  metatarsal  minor — The  plantaris  muscle. 

Tarso  metatarsal — In  anatomy  the  articulations  which 
connect  the  second  row  of  bones  of  the  tarsus  and  the 
metatarsal  bones;  also  the  ligaments,  distinguished  into 
dorsal  and  plantar,  by  which  articulations  are  secured. 

Tarsophyma — An  operation  for  the  removal  of  the 
tarsus  cartilage. 

Tibia — The  large  bone  of  the  leg. 

Unguis — Nail. 

Vesicatorium — A  blister. 


146  CHIROPODY  MANUAL. 

BHIEF  ANATOMY  OF  THE  FOOT. 
The  Bones. 

The  tarsus  (instep)  is  composed  of  seven  bones.  The 
metatarsal  bones  are  five  in  number.  They  articulate 
with  the  tarsal  bones  at  one  extremity,  and  the  pha- 
langes (toe  bones)  at  the  other  range.  The  tarsal  and 
metatarsal  bones  are  so  united  as  to  give  the  foot  an 
arched  form.  This  gives  elasticity  to  the  step  and  the 
spring  of  the  arch  prevents  injury.  The  phalanges  of  the 
foot  is  composed  of  fourteen  bones.  The  small  toes 
have  three  ranges  of  bones,  while  the  large  toe  has  but 
two. 

The  tarsus  (instep)  is  composed  of  the  following 
bones:  The  astragalus  os  calcis,  os  naviculare,  oa  cu- 
boidea  and  the  three  cuneiform  bones,  called  os  cunei- 
form medium.  Metatarsus  consists  of  five  small  bones 
placed  between  the  tarsus  and  the  phalanges. 

The  sesamoid  bones  are  found  at  the  articulation  of 
th.e,  great  toe.  Articulations  are  the  parts  where  any 
two  or  more  bones  that  are  to  play  on  each  other  come 
in  contact.  To  give  strength  to  the  articulation  fibrous 
bands,  called  ligaments,  bind  one  bone  to  another. 
Sprains  and  dislocations  are  mainly  caused  by  false 
steps  or  movements  by  which  the  articular  ligaments 
are  torn  or  violently  stretched.  Negligence  and  im- 
proper care  for  blows  or  sprains  on  the  joints  is  liable 


CHIROPODY  MANUAL.  147 

to  endanger  life.  The  joint  may  become  inflamed,  water 
will  be  liable  to  form  in  them  and  the  bones  thicken 
and  the  disease  known  as  white  swelling  be  the  result. 
The  seven  bones  of  the  tarsus  are  so  arranged  as  to 
form  the  strongest  support  to  the  body  and  elastic 
arch.  The  most  important  of  these  bones  is  the  as- 
tragalus. This  bone,  with  the  tibia  and  fibula,  form  the 
ankle  joint;  its  semicircular  head  forms  a  complete  pul- 
ley; it  rolls  under  the  articulating  surface  of  the  tibia 
and  fibula,  and  the  groove,  from  its  boat -like  shape,  into 
which  it  enters,  is  called  the  scaphoid  cavity.  The  at- 
tention of  the  reader  is  called  to  the  articulation  of  the 
OS  naviculare  or  scaphoid  bone. 

The  phalanges  (the  toes)  consist  of  fourteen  bones 
in  each  foot,  viz.:  Plantar  muscle,  the  extensor  tarsi 
minor,  the  plantaris.  Plantar  nerves:  Two  nerves,  an 
external  and  internal,  proceeding  from  the  posterior 
tibial,  the  internal  to  the  outer  side  of  the  fourth  and 
fifth  and  to  the  muscles  situated  on  the  side  of  the  foot. 

MUSCLES. 

The  following  are  the  names  of  the  muscles  that  flex, 
or  move,  the  ankles,  feet  and  toes:  Tibialis  anticus, 
used  to  flex  the  foot  and  turn  it  obliquely  inward;  ex- 
tensor longus  pollicis,  used  to  extend  the  great  toe; 
extensor  longus  digitorum,  used  to  extend  the  toes;  per- 
oneus  tertius  forms  a  part  of  the  extensor  longus  and 


148  CHIROPODY   MANUAL. 

goes  to  the  little  toe.  The  gastronemius,  used  to  extend 
the  foot;  popliteus,  to  flex  the  leg;  flexor  longus  digi- 
torum,  used  to  extend  the  foot;  Tibialis  posticus,  used 
to  extend  the  foot;  peronous  longus,  used  to  extend  the 
foot  and  turn  it  outward;  peroneus  brevis,  used  to  ex- 
tend the  foot  and  turn  it  outward.  The  forenamed 
twelve  muscles  of  the  leg  flex,  or  extend  the  foot  or  toes. 

The  following  are  the  names  of  twelve  muscles  of  the 
foot — extend,  draw  or  flex  the  toes  and  joints:  The 
first  two  on  the  dorsum  the  last  ten  on  the  sole.  The 
extensor  brevis  digitorum  originates  in  outer  part  of  the 
08  caleis,  inserted  and  expands  over  the  toes,  and  is 
used  to  extend  the  phalanges.  Interossei  dorsales  occu- 
pies the  interosseal  spaces,  used  to  extend  the  toes. 
Abductor  poUicis  has  its  origin  on  the  os  caleis  and  the 
annular  lig  is  inserted  in  the  first  phalanx  of  great  toe 
and  is  used  to  draw  the  great  toe  from  the  others.  Mus- 
cular accessorius  used  to  flex  the  toes.  Lumbricalis,  used 
to  flex  the  first  joint  of  the  great  toe.  Abductor  polli- 
cis  used  to  bring  the  great  toe  toward  the  rest;  flexor 
brevis  versalis  pedis,  used  to  draw  the  toe  together. 
Interossei  plantaris  occupy  the  interosseal  spaces  and 
adduct  the  toes. 

SELECTION  AND  CARE  OF  TOOLS. 

Good  tools  are  as  essential  in  this  profession  as  any 
work  we  teach  and  it  is  advisable  to  use  only  the  best. 


CHIROPODY  MANUAL.  149 

Many  chiropodists  prefer  using  a  great  many  knives 
of  different  varieties,  but  experience  has  taught  us  that 
it  is  better  to  use  as  small  a  variety  as  possible  in  order 
to  become  more  familiar  with  each  instrument. 

HONES. 

The  best  hones  we  have  found  for  sharpening  chirop- 
odist's instruments  is  the  Cuban  clay,  a  very  convenient 
size  is  from  2  to  4  inches  long  and  from  1  to  2  inches 
wide. 

Hones  for  flesh-cutting  instruments  must  be  of  the 
coarser  variety  than  those  used  by  barbers,  but  not  as 
coarse  as  those  used  to  sharpen  most  edged  tools,  this 
making  them  difficult  to  select. 

NAH.   NIPPEKS. 
The  Nail  Nipper  should  be  strong  and  with  a  spiral 
spring.     They  are  for  cutting  heavy  nails  and  almost 
indispensable. 

CHISEL  KNIFE. 


This  is  a  very  convenient  instrument  for  fine  work 
and  should  not  be  used  on  heavy  callouses  or  nails.  One 
end  has  a  sharp  cutting  edge  with  the  other  blunt  and 
rounded  for  work  on  soft  corns. 


150 


CHIROPODY  MANUAL. 


TWEEZERS. 
Tweezers   are  important   in  lifting  small  particles  of 
cuticle  as  it  is  being  removed,  also   for  handling  small 
bits  of  medicated  cotton. 


SHEARS. 


The  shears  must  be  made  of  solid  steel  and  of  the  beat 
grade,  as  they  are  very  delicately  constructed,  and  for 
the  work  required  of  them  would  be  useless  in  t^o 
cheaper  grades. 

SCAPULA. 

This  is  an  instrument  that  must  be  selected  with  care. 
The  metal  should  be  of  the  highest  grade  of  steel  that 
will  not  be  affected  by  acids.  The  handle  should  be  of 
material  that  can  be  placed  in  boiling  water  without^ 
being  affected. 


CHIROPODY    MANUAL.  151 

OPERATING  KNIFE. 

The  most  useful  instrument  is  the  operating  knife, 
which  can  be  used  for  nearly  every  purpose. 

The  scapula  is  a  longer  blade,  with  single  edge  and 
is  intended  for  stronger  work  or  heavier  callouses.  It 
is  also  useful  in  scraping  nails  or  splitting  ingrown 
nails.  The  shears  should  be  of  strong,  heavy  construc- 
tion, very  short  and  with  bent  blades,  similar  to  the 
manicuring  shear,  except  that  it  should  be  much 
stronger.  They  are  intended  for  trimming  the  nails, 
cutting  padding,  chamois,  etc.  They  are  also  used  for 
trimming  cuticle  in  pedicuring  and  removing  particles 
of  callouses  and  dead  cuticle. 

Instruments  can  be  sterilized  by  dipping  in  a  mild 
solution  of  carbolic  acid.  Solution  should  be  about 
10  per  cent.  In  addition  to  this,  they  should  be  dipped 
in  boiling  water  after  a  bad  operation.  They  may  also 
be  passed  quickly  through  a  gas  flame,  but  care  should 
be  taken  that  they  are  not  left  long  enough  to  heat  suf- 
ficiently to  spoil  the  temper. 

The  diseases  of  the  feet  that  we  will  herein  describe 
are  hard  corns,  soft  corns,  bunions,  ingrowing  toe  nails, 
callouses,  excessive  perspiration. 

HARD   CORNS. 

First  soak  the  feet  from  five  to  ten  minutes  in  a  foot 
tub  of  water  as  hot  as  bearable,  which  is  intended  to 
soften  the  corn  and  remove  inflammation.     Place  your- 


152 


CHIROPODY    MANUAL. 


self  on  the  stool  in  front  of  your  subject.  Take  the 
foot  from  the  tub  and  wipe  thoroughly.  Hold  the  toe 
between  the  first  finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand 
and  the  knife  with  the  right  hand,  and  remove  thin 
layers  of  the  callouses  by  cutting  towards  you  and  be- 
ginning in  the  center.     Trim  the  flesh  with  the  knife 


i( 


HARD   CORNS. 


until  it  feels  soft  and  pliable,  being  very  cautious  nSt 
to  cut   deep   enough   to   draw  blood.     Leave   the   outer 


CHIROPODY   MANUAL.  153 

surface  smooth.  When  all  callous  has  been  removed, 
apply  vaseline  or  mutton  tallow  prepared  with  a  small 
preparation  of  sweet  oil.  Apply  by  rubbing  well  into 
the  corn  with  a  circular  movement,  or  from  the  nail 
back.  After  all  substance  has  been  absorbed,  you  are 
ready  for  padding.  Prepare  your  padding  by  first  tak- 
ing a  very  thin  piece  of  cotton,  laid  perfectly  smooth 
over  the  afflicted  part  and  held  in  place  by  a  very  little 
collodion  at  the  edges.  Prepare  a  chamois  pad  by  cut- 
ting a  small  piece  off  of  your  chamois  skin,  just  large 
enough  to  cover  the  corn  and  cotton.  Cut  it  round 
and  then  fold  double  and  cut  a  small  piece  out  of  the 
center.  When  unfolded  it  will  be  perfectly  round  and 
you  should  be  careful  not  to  get  it  too  large  or  too 
small  to  fit  the  case.  In  some  cases,  two  thicknesses 
will  be  necessary.  This  is  to  be  held  in  place  by  a 
narrow  adhesive  strip  fastened  both  above  and  below. 

SOFT  CORNS. 

In  this  treatment^  soak  the  feet  the  same  as  with  the 
hard  corn  and  wipe  as  before.  Soft  corns  always  appear 
between  the  toes,  and  usually  caused  from  moisture 
either  from  perspiration  or  not  sufficiently  drying  be- 
tween the  toes  after  bathing  the  feet. 

They  come  in  the  form  of  a  blister  and  are  covered 
with  a  white  or  yellow  skin,  which  must  be  removed 
with  the  knife  as  shown  in  cut.     Spread  the  toes  apart 


(54 


GHIROPODY    MANUAL. 


SOFT  CORNS. 

with  the  finger  and  thumb  and  remove  the  top  layer  by 
working  the  knife  under  the  cuticle  and  removing  small 
pieces  at  a  time,  using  the  shears  to  detach  the  cuticle 
as  it  is  loosened  or  in  many  cases,  tweezers  are  neces- 
sary. Great  care  must  be  used  not  to  cut  too  deep 
and  draw  the  blood,  as,  in  the  former  cases,  here  lies 
the  danger  of  blood  poison.    Use  Ointment  No.  2,  as  ex- 


CHIROPODY   MANUAL.  155 

plained  in  the  following  pages,  which  is  principally 
composed  of  vaseline  and  oxide  of  zinc.  A  sufficient 
amount  of  this  to  soften  the  cuticle  should  be  left  be- 
tween the  toes.  Prepare  a  small  piece  of  cotton  to  put 
between  the  toes  by  taking  it  between  the  finger  and 
thumb  and  pulling  it  smooth  and  thin  so  that  it  will 
not  roll  into  a  hard  lump  and  cause  irritation.  Treat- 
ment should  be  given  once  a  week,  at  least,  and  in  bad 
cases,  every  third  day  until  relieved. 

BUNIONS. 

Bunions  usually  appear  on  the  second  joint  of  the 
big  toe  or  at  the  base  of  the  little  toe,  usually  the 
former.  Soak,  the  same  as  in  the  former  case,  and 
trim  with  the  scapula,  if  callous  appears.  Remove  all 
signs  of  such.  Treat  with  a  solution  of  equal  portions 
of  Iodine  and  Belladonna.  Apply  w'ith  camel's  hair 
brush.  If  any  inflammation,  apply  a  softening  solution, 
the  same  as  used  for  soft  corns. 

Prepare  your  padding  the  same  as  in  the  ease  of  hard 
corns,  oftentimes  using  two  and  fcliree  thicknesses  of 
chamois  in  bad  cases.  Prepare  cotton  in  the  same  form 
as  chamois  as  shown  in  cut. 

The  usual  cause  of  bunions  is  wearing  shoes  that 
are  too  narrow  and  this  cause  must  be  removed  before 
you  can  effect  a  cure.  It  may  be  caused  also  by  wear- 
ing shoes  that  are  too  short  and  the  constant  jar  ot 


156 


CHIROPODY   MANUAL. 


PADDING. 


walking  injures  the  joint.  In  severe  cases,  where  pus 
appears,  it  should  be  poulticed  with  flaxseed  or  bread 
and  milk  until  all  inflammation  is  removed.  After 
being  poulticed  a  sufficient  length  of  time  to  bring 
the  pus  to  the  surface,  usually  a  few  days,  remove 
the    poultice   and    extract   the   pus>,      Treat    with    your 


CHIROPODY    MANUAL. 


157 


antiseptic  solution  and  pad  as  described.  The  idea  of 
padding  around  the  bunion  is  to  remove  the  pressure  of 
the  shoe  at  the  immediate  point  afflicted. 

INGROWN  TOE  NAILS. 

This  affliction  is  usually  limited  to  the  great  toe,  al- 
though sometimes  it  affects  the  small  ones.  The  first 
treatment  is  to  raise  the  side  or  corner  that  is  causing 


INGROWN    TOE   NAILS. 


158  CHIROPODY    MANUAL. 

the  irritation  by  lifting  it  as  much  as  possible  with 
the  orange  stick,  the  same  as  used  for  manicuring  pur- 
poses, and  gently  work  cotton  under  the  edge.  Work 
as  much  cotton  underneath  the  nail  as  it  will  allow 
without  causing  pain  and  thoroughly  antisept  the  af- 
flicted part  by  bathing  well  with  a  mild  solution  of  car- 
bolic acid  or  peroxide.  Remove  the  cotton  and  put  in 
fresh,  dry  cotton  in  its  place.  Never  trim  the  edge  of 
the  nail  that  is  growing  in,  as  it  causes  it  to  continue 
to  grow  in  that  direction.  Cut  your  nail  straight 
across  the  end  and  notch  V  shape  in  the  center  as 
deep  as  the  cuticle  will  allow;  also  scrape  the  top  of 
the  nail  from  the  notch  to  the  base  of  the  nail,  allow- 
ing the  nail  to  contract  or  grow  to  the  center  in  place 
of  the  side.  In  severe  cases,  it  may  be  found  neces- 
sary to  split  the  nail  near  the  afflicted  edge  as  far 
back  as  the  inflammation  appears.  In  case  pus  appears, 
poultice  the  same  as  the  bunion  and  remove  all  in- 
flammation before  treating  further.  In  case  of  pus 
always  treat  well  with  the  antiseptics  before  trimming 
and  treating  the  nail. 

CALLOUSES. 

Callouses,  except  as  spoken  of  in  connection  with 
corns  and  bunions,  appear  on  the  bottom  of  the  foot  and 
form  a  thick  fibre  that  must  be  removed  before  at- 
tempting to  effect  a  cure.     Remove  the  callous  with  the 


CHIROPODY   MANUAL. 


150 


scapula  a  little  at  a  time,  being  careful  not  to  cut  tuo 
deep.  Remove  all  signs  of  dead  cuticle  and  trim  until 
the  pink  surface  appears.  The  blade  of  the  knife 
should  be  held  as  flat  as  possible  to  avoid  cutting  too 
deep. 


CALLOUSES. 


Use  antiseptic  and  softening  salve,  the  same  as  used 
for  hard  corns  and  pad  the  same  as  for  bunions.  Great 
care  must  be  used  in  fastening  padding,  by  using  more 


160  CHIROPODY   MANUAL. 

adhesive  strip  across  the  bottom  and  around  on  each 
side  of  the  foot.  Padding  is  more  liable  to  be  dis- 
turbed on  the  bottom  of  the  foot  than  on  bunions,  and 
sufficient  adhesive  must  be  used  to  keep  it  in  place. 

CHILBLAINS. 

Chilblains  and  frost  bites  of  long  standing  can  be 
entirely  eradicated  by  constant  bathing  in  witch  hazel 
or  a  solution  as  given  in  the  following  pages. 

Fresh  frost  bites  or  open  sores  caused  from  chil- 
blains should  be  treated  first  with  antiseptics  and  later 
with  the  solutions,  applied  frequently. 

ARTICLES  USED  IN  CHIROPODY. 

Absorbent  Cotton,  Chamois,  Carbolic  Acid, 

Iodine,  Oxide   of  Zinc,        Monsell's  Solution, 

Colodion,  Vaseline,  Sub-Sulphate  of 

Peroxide  of  Hy-      Tannin,  Iron, 

drogen,  Adhesive  Strip, 

RECIPES     FOR     CHIROPODY. 

For  Perspiring  Feet. 
i    oz.    Tannin    in    one   quart  of   water.      Apply   with 
sponge. 

For  Soft  Corns. 
Vaseline  and  Oxide  of  Zinc.     Equal  parts. 

For  Ingrown  Toe  Nails. 
Monsell's  Solution.     Prepared  at  any  drug  store. 


CHIROPODY   MANUAL.  161 

For  Sterilizing  Instruments. 
10  per  cent,  solution  of  carbolic  acid. 

Antiseptic, 
Peroxide  of  Hydrogen  is  used  for  antiseptic,  also  to 
stop  bleeding.     Sub-sulphate  of  iron  is  also  used  to  stop 
bleeding,  where  bleeding  is  profuse. 
For  Bunions. 

Iodine,   1  dr.;  Belladonna,  1  dr. 

For   Foot  Powder. 
Flower  of  Sulphur,  2  oz.;    Boracic  Acid,  4  oz. ;    Tal- 
cum,  6    oz. ;    makes   a  good   foot  powder    and   corrects 
bad  odor. 

Corn    Salve. 

1  oz.  Beeswax,  2  oz.  Sweet  Oil,  12  drops  of  Turpen- 
tine. Heat  Oil  and  Wax,  add  Turpentine  when  almost 
cold. 

For  Chilblains. 

1  pt.  Vinegar,  1  pt.  Alcohol,  1  oz.  Muriate  of  Am- 
monia. 


162  CHIROPODY  MANUAL. 

POULTICE  FOR  REMOVING  INFLAMMATION. 

Use  a  small  sack,  partly  filled  with  hops,  boiled  a 
short  time  in  hot  water.  Apply  to  affected  part  for  re- 
movincr  inflammation. 


FLAX  SEED  POULTICE. 

Sufficient  amount  of  linseed  meal  boiled  in  water  to 
thicken;  stir  well  while  boiling.  Put  in  cloth  and  apply 
to  affected  part  as  hot  as  possible. 

LOTION    FOR    ULCERS    AND    CHILBLAINS. 

Spirits  of  rosemary    1  dr. 

Laudanum    1  dr. 

Distilled  lead  water    1  oz. 

Applv  with  bandages. 

OINTMENT  FOR  ULCERS. 

Almond   oil    1  dr. 

Boracic  acid    1  dr. 

White  wax  1  dr. 

Vaseline     1  oz. 

Mix  and  apply. 


THE  MOLER  BARBER  SIPPLY  tlOlSE 

39    PECK     CO  URT 

^ 

Everything  in  tools,  cutlery 
and  cosmetics  at 

CUT    RATES 

RAZORS                    JACKETS 
SHEARS                     BRUSHES 
COMBS                     BAY  RUM 
HONES                      SEA  FOAM 
STROPS                    CREAM 
CLIPPERS                TONICS 

AGENTS   FOR    THE 
BEST.       MASSAGE 
VIBRATOR     MADE. 

Write  for  free  catalogue. 

39    PECK    COURT 

CHICAGO,     ILLINOIS 

JAN  27  1996 


«/ 


306    90 


t-»  r 


9^. 


^ 
^^.    * 


>"0 


©  «  0 


^.^<S^  * 


u  rk> 


<?^     "  o  «  0  •'       -(J,' 


."> 


^°^ 


•  .  I  -      .0 


^o. 


kPvN 


a,*       -^        A^      ♦ 


•  I  t 


V.^'^ 


w  '  « 


»° 


0-^  ^^ 


o  ■  • 


'V.9'^'   * 


HECKMAN 

BINDERY  INC. 

k    JUL  90 

N.  MANCHESTFR 


liiliipiSil'iiiilijSIp 


LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS 


0  014  084  333  7